Owners Manual - ESD

VOLVO S60
Owners Manual
Web Edition
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
00 01 02
4
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 12
Seatbelts ..................................................
Airbags......................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*...........
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .........................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
WHIPS ......................................................
When the systems deploy ........................
Safety mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
18
21
24
26
28
29
31
32
33
Remote control key/key blade..................
Privacy locking*.........................................
Battery replacement, remote control key/
PCC*.........................................................
Keyless drive*............................................
Locking/unlocking.....................................
Child safety locks......................................
Alarm*.......................................................
42
47
48
50
54
60
61
Table of contents
03 04 05
03 Your driving environment
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
05 Infotainment system
Instruments and controls.......................... 66
Key positions............................................ 74
Seats......................................................... 76
Steering wheel.......................................... 80
Lighting..................................................... 81
Wipers and washing.................................. 90
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 92
Compass*................................................. 97
Power sunroof*......................................... 98
Alcoguard*.............................................. 100
Starting the engine.................................. 104
Starting the engine – external battery..... 106
Gearboxes............................................... 107
All-wheel drive – AWD*........................... 112
Foot brake............................................... 113
Parking brake.......................................... 115
Menus and messages............................. 124
Menu system MY CAR........................... 127
Climate control........................................ 132
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*.................. 142
Additional heater*.................................... 145
Trip computer......................................... 146
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................................... 148
Adapting driving characteristics............. 150
Cruise control*........................................ 151
Speed limiter .......................................... 153
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 155
Distance Alert*........................................ 165
City Safety™........................................... 168
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 172
Driver Alert System – DAC*..................... 179
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 182
Park assist syst*...................................... 185
Park assist camera*................................ 188
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 191
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................................ 195
General information on infotainment......
Quick start...............................................
General infotainment functions...............
Radio.......................................................
Media player...........................................
External audio source via AUX/USB*
input........................................................
HomeLinkŸ *............................................ 118
200
202
206
209
216
220
Media BluetoothŸ* ................................. 223
TV*........................................................... 226
Remote control* ..................................... 230
BluetoothŸ handsfree*............................ 232
Voice recognition* mobile phone............ 240
Menu navigation, Infotainment............... 244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Table of contents
06 07 08
06 During your journey
Recommendations during driving...........
Refuelling................................................
Fuel.........................................................
Loading...................................................
Cargo area .............................................
Driving with a trailer................................
Towing and recovery..............................
6
07 Wheels and tyres
250
253
254
257
259
260
266
General ...................................................
Changing wheels ...................................
Tyre pressure .........................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*..........
Emergency puncture repair (TMK) .........
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Maintenance and service
270
274
276
277
278
280
Engine compartment...............................
Lamps.....................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Car care..................................................
286
293
299
301
304
312
Table of contents
09 10
09 Specifications
Type designations...................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids and lubricants...............................
Fuel.........................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ........................................................
Electrical system.....................................
Type approval.........................................
Symbols in the display............................
10 Alphabetical Index
320
322
325
326
328
330
Alphabetical Index.................................. 350
332
335
336
346
7
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for example.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
8
Decals
NOTE
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.
Information
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
Risk of property damage
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
G031592
G031593
There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
9
Introduction
Important information
• Coolant
• Engine oil
To be continued
`` This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
The driving and safety systems in the car use
computers which check and share information
with each other on the car's function. One or
more of these computers may store information on the systems they check during normal
driving, during the course of a collision or nearcollision. Stored information may be used by:
•
•
•
•
10
Volvo Car Corporation
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Laser sensor
This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which
transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to
follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels in English are fitted
directly on the laser sensor unit:
The upper label in the figure describes the laser
beam's classification:
• Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M
laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the laser
beam's physical data:
• IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the
exception of deviations in accordance with
"Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 μJ
Police or other authorities
Maximum average output
45 mW
Other parties who claim legal entitlement
for access to the information or someone
who has permission from the owner to
access the information.
Pulse duration
33 ns
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
28° × 12°
Service or repair workshops
Introduction
Important information
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation,
do not carry out any readjustments or
maintenance other than those specified
here.
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe
and therefore entails a risk of injury.
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits laser light
when the remote control key is in position II and also with the engine switched
off (see page 74 on key positions).
For more information on the laser sensor, see
page 168.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
G000000
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most resourceefficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
12
fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, carpets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
and fulfils the certification requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our sys1
tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
Reducing environmental impact
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 250 and
330.
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
• Drive economically - think ahead.
• Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
• If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
• High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in
this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.
More information on www.oekotex.com
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
14
Introduction
15
Seatbelts ................................................................................................
Airbags....................................................................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*.........................................................
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .......................................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
WHIPS ....................................................................................................
When the systems deploy ......................................................................
Safety mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
16
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
18
21
24
26
28
29
31
32
33
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
General information
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat1.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection.
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal
seating position.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does
not hang loose.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A
loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
1
18
Certain markets.
Height adjustment of seatbelt's upper fix-point.
Press in the button and move the upper fix-point
vertically. Position the upper fix-point as high as
possible without the belt chafing against your
throat.
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on
the shoulder.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
01 Safety
Seatbelts
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.
Make sure that you:
• do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
• the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
• tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
WARNING
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some
of the protective characteristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears
to be undamaged. In addition, replace the
seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The
new seatbelt must be type-approved and
intended for installation in the same position
as the replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelts and pregnancy
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
01
in the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed between
the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits as close to the body as possible. In
addition, check that there are no twists in the
seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
WARNING
G020998
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn
``
19
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder
Rear seat
Certain markets
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
• Provides information on which seatbelts
G017726
are being used in the rear seat. A message
appears in the information display when
the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear
doors has been opened. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk's READ button.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
20
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.
The message on the information display showing which seatbelts are in use is always available. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
01
As well as the warning symbol, a message may
appear on the information display in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
G018666
Airbag system
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
G018665
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II or III. The symbol
clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the
airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault
in the system. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop
immediately.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
``
21
01 Safety
01
Airbags
Passenger airbag
NOTE
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passenger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver and passenger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted
to the collision force to which the vehicle is
subjected.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
22
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
23
01 Safety
01
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required position. Volvo recommends that the remote control key's key blade be used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 46.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger the life of passengers in the
car.
24
WARNING
Activating/deactivating
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch
(Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the
airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol
in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
Switch location.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof panel
(see page 25) indicates that the airbag is
deactivated and if the warning symbol for
the airbag system is also displayed in the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
01
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to
key position II or III the warning symbol for
the airbag is displayed on the combined
instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see
page 21).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions for the remote control key, see
page 74.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
G017800
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger life.
Messages
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
2
G017724
2
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
25
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
G032949
WARNING
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Location
G024377
Side airbag
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The side airbag is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated1 passenger airbag.
G024378
01
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1
26
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 24.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
27
01 Safety
01
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
28
01 Safety
WHIPS
Protection against whiplash injury –
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
01
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
``
29
01 Safety
01
WHIPS
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
30
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
When the systems deploy
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner,
front seat
In the event of overturning, a frontal collision and/or sideimpact accident
and/or rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In the event of overturning and a frontal
collision
Airbags (SRS)
In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS)
In a side-impact
accident
Inflatable Curtain IC
In the event of a
side-impact accident, overturning
and a frontal collision if the car is not
hit directly head-on
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
• Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
01
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
• Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
Whiplash protection
WHIPS
A
In a rear-end collision
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner systems are deployed only once during a collision.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the
centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such
as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the
car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different
safety systems of the car are activated.
31
01 Safety
01
Safety mode
Driving after a collision
G021062
effect that the ignition is on, press the start
button. Then close the door and reinsert the
remote control key. The car's electronics will
now try to reset themselves to normal mode.
Then try to start the car.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on the
information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
32
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the car
impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after Safety
mode See manual has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode message is displayed. Leave
the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rearfacing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age.
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can damage the straps.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
Child seats
You may place:
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 35.
• a child seat/booster cushion on the passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions
NOTE
in the rear seat.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with
optimum conditions for your child to travel
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
1
G020739
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
01
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If
a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.
``
33
01 Safety
01
Child safety
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
34
WARNING
Label Airbag
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel
on the passenger side, see the illustration on page
24.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 0
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system. This fitting
requires an ISOFIX bracket* for correct
installation.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
2
Centre rear seat
Type approval: E5 04301146.
Type approval: E5 04301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146.
Type approval: E1 04301146.
Type approval: E1 04301146.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
35
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - frontfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - frontfacing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191.
Type approval: E5 04191.
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169.
Type approval: E1 04301169.
Type approval: E1 04301169.
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139.
Type approval: E5 03139.
Type approval: E5 03139.
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
36
Centre rear seat
01 Safety
Child safety
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information, see page 60.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
NOTE
The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory
for the passenger seat.
Full size, rear-facing child
seat
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
Size classes
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Description
C
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
Size
class
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child
seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), frontfacing child seat
01
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
``
37
01 Safety
01
Child safety
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
max 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
–
–
G
–
–
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 10 kg
E
–
OK
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
–
OK
D
–
OKA
C
–
OKB
D
–
OKA
C
–
OKB
Child seat, rear-facing
38
Weight
9-18 kg
01 Safety
Child safety
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
A
B
C
D
E
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
01
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
B
OKC D
OKC
B1
OKC D
OKC
A
OKC E
OKC
For the infant/child seat to have space in the rear seat the seat in front must be adjusted longitudinally to a position in front of centre position.
The infant/child seat does not fit behind the driver's seat. The passenger seat must be adjusted longitudinally to a position in front of centre position for the infant/child seat to fit.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
For the child seat to have space in the car the seat must be adjusted to its top position and the backrest angled backward so that the child seat fits.
For the child seat to have space in the car the ISOFIX guide must not be used. The seat must be adjusted to its top position and the backrest angled backward so that the child seat fits
Upper mounting points for child seats
cealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the plastic covers to access each respective mounting
point.
For cars with folding head restraints on the
outside seats the head restraints should be
folded to facilitate installation.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
routed under the rear head restraints before
being tensioned at the mounting point.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats for as long as possible.
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats. These mounting points
are located on the parcel shelf and are con-
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
39
Remote control key/key blade................................................................
Privacy locking*.......................................................................................
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*......................................
Keyless drive*..........................................................................................
Locking/unlocking...................................................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................
Alarm*......................................................................................................
40
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
42
47
48
50
54
60
61
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
General
02
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys
or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). They
are used to start the car and for locking and
unlocking.
More remote control keys can be ordered – up
to 6 can be programmed and used for the same
car.
The PCC has increased functionality compared with the remote control key. The continuation of this chapter describes the functions
available in both the PCC and the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Always remember to switch off the power
supply to power windows and sunroof by
removing the remote control key if the driver
leaves the car.
• Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked in the menu system My
Car under Information Number of keys .
For a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
• Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
Key memory1 – door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see pages
77 and 94 .
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under SETUP
Car settings Car Key memory.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
For cars with Keyless drive system, see
page 50.
Loss of a remote control key
Indicator for locking/unlocking
If you lose a remote control key then new ones
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must then be taken to
the workshop. The code of the missing remote
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
1
2
42
control key must be erased from the system as
a theft prevention measure.
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
are folded2 in
rors are folded2 out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks have been activated once the doors have
been closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking with light can be set in the car's menu system, see page 127.
Search in the menu system MY CAR for
Light settings and
SETUP Car settings
select Indicator light locking and/or
Indicator light unlocking.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Message
Specification
Key error Try again
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting Remove the key, reinsert it and try to
start again.
Car key not found
Error reading the
PCC during starting
- Try to start again.
(Only applies to Keyless drive with PCC.)
If the error persists:
Press the remote
control key into the
ignition switch and
try to start again.
Same LED as alarm indicator, see page 61.
A flashing LED in the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be driven with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:
Immobiliser Try
start again
Error in immobiliser
system during starting. If the fault persists the recommendation is to contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Functions
02
G021078
Lock indicator
Remote control key.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Boot lid
Panic function
For starting the car, see page 104.
``
43
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all
windows simultaneously.
G021079
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the button and,
after a further press of the button - within 10
seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and boot lid
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all
the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that no one is
in danger of getting hands caught.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and boot
lid while the alarm is deactivated.
44
The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under SETUP Car settings
Lock settings for doors Unlocking
with both the alternatives All doors and Driver
door, then all. For a description of the menu
system, see page 127.
Approach light duration – Used to switch
on the car's lighting at a distance. For more
information, see page 86.
The remote control key's functions have a
range of about 20 m from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc. The
car can always be locked/unlocked using
the key blade, see page 46.
Unique functions PCC*
Boot lid – Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the boot lid only. For more information, see
page 56.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G021080
02
Range
PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.
NOTE
The information button functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Using the information button
Press the information button
02
.
Out of PCC range
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is interrupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light travelling around on the PCC.
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps – The alarm was triggered less
than 5 minutes ago.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
boot lid is about 20 m from the car, for other
functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
``
45
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Detachable key blade
02
Unlocking doors with the key blade
Removing the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door can be
opened as follows:
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
NOTE
G021082
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
• the left-hand front door can be opened
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see
page 51.
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 60.
• the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the
event of power failure, see page 54.
• access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking*) is blocked, see
page 47.
• the boot lid can be opened manually if the
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
car has a flat battery, see page 57.
• the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,
see page 24.
46
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see
page 51.
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
General information on privacy locking
locked and the boot lid lock is disconnected
from the central locking - the boot lid cannot
be opened with either the central locking button in the front doors or the remote control key.
G021083
This means that the remote control key without
key blade can only be used to activate/deactivate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive
the car.
Active locks for remote control key with key blade.
The remote control key without key blade can
then be handed over to the service or hotel staff
- the loose key blade is retained by the car
owner.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is vertical in the locked position for privacy locking.
02
Pull out the key blade. The information display shows a message at the same time.
The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid
can no longer be unlocked with the remote
control key or the central locking button.
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote
control key but keep it in a safe place
instead.
• Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
G021084
For information on locking the glovebox only,
see page 55.
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated.
The privacy locking function is intended for
when the car is left for service, with a hotel
parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
47
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
Replacing the battery
02
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
The batteries should be replaced if:
• the information symbol is illuminated and
the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
Remove control key (1 battery)
and/or
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
PCC* (2 batteries)
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals
with your fingers, as this could damage their
functionality.
48
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with
the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V
- one in the remote control key and two in the
PCC.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally-friendly way.
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
Keyless lock and ignition system (only
PCC1)
General
the car door handle or boot lid. This means that
the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the PCC with him or her. It is not
possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is
on the opposite side of the car.
G020577
The red rings in the preceding illustration indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply have to have
the PCC with you. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, e.g.
when your hands are full.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see
page 42.
PCC range
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
1
50
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the
engine is running or key position II is active
(see page 74) and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information
display and an audio reminder signal sounds at
the same time.
The warning message clears and the audio
reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought
back to the car after:
• a door has been opened and closed
• the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
• the READ button has been pressed.
Handling the PCC safely
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car,
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
Personal Car Communicator, see page 44.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the keyless drive system. For this reason, do not place the PCC near mobile phones
or metallic objects.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the PCC and the key blade as a remote control
key., see page 43.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Locking
Unlocking with the key blade
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the
gear selector must be set in the P position
– otherwise the car cannot be locked or the
alarm armed.
02
Unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the boot lid's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or boot
lid as normal.
Cars with the Keyless system have a pressuresensitive area on the outer handle of the doors and
a rubberised button next to the boot lid's rubberised pressure plate.
Lock the doors and the boot lid with one long
press on any of the door handles' pressuresensitive areas or press the smaller of the boot
lid's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator
in the windscreen confirms that locking has
been completed by starting to flash, see
page 43.
All doors and the boot lid must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with thick
gloves on or after a very quick hand movement a second attempt may be required, or
with the glove taken off.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then
the left-hand front door can be opened with the
PCC's detachable key blade (see page 46).
To access the lock cylinder the door handle's
plastic cover must be detached:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover is prized loose automatically by the torque when the blade
is pushed straight up and into the opening.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
51
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
page 43.
2. Insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and
unlock the door.
02
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
in the ignition switch, see page 62.
Key memory2 – driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach the
car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are
implemented for the person who opens the
driver's door.
Antenna location
• Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 77.
• Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 77 and 94.
Lock settings
The Keyless function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which
doors shall be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there
select between All doors unlock, Any door,
Doors on same side and Both front doors.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCCB shall drive, the settings can be changed in
three ways:
• Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, centre, inside
Door handle, left rear
Parcel shelf, centre, underside
Roof, centre above rear seat
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
2
52
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
From the outside
02
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors and the boot lid simultaneously. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected,
see Unlocking with the remote control key,
page 44.
Other doors do not have lock cylinders, but
instead have lock knobs on each door's end
face which must be re-turned - then they are
mechanically locked/blocked against opening
from the outside. They can still be opened from
the inside.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
door with the detachable key blade, see
page 46.
WARNING
Manual locking of the door.
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see page 61.)
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade, see page 51.
54
A door's knob control only locks that
particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an
activated manual child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside, see page 60. A rear door
that is locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key or
central locking button.
Central locking
Automatic relocking
In certain situations the car must be locked
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
•
From the inside
Be aware that there is a risk that you can be
locked in the car if it is locked from the outside.
Manual locking
NOTE
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see page 46.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
Central locking.
All of the doors and the boot lid can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
locking button on the driver's door and the
passenger door*.
• Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
• Press the central locking button
Locking
• Press the central locking button
- all
closed doors are locked.
dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows and the sunroof*
simultaneously.
Automatic locking
Lock button* rear doors
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
door locking. (For a description of the menu
system, see page 127.)
.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
02
The doors and boot lid are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
• Pull the door handle and open the door the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
Glovebox
Lamp in lock button
Central locking is available in two variants - the
lamp in the central locking button for the driver's door has different meanings dependent on
the variant.
With central locking button only in the driver's
door, other doors have no button:
• Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locked.
The button's lamp illuminates when the door is
locked.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their
respective rear door.
To unlock the door:
With central locking button on both front doors
and electric lock button in each rear door:
• Pull the door handle - the door is unlocked
• Illuminated lamp means that only that par-
Global opening
ticular door is locked. When all buttons are
illuminated all doors are locked.
and opened.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 46).
02
Locking the glovebox:
Boot lid
Manual opening
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
luggage compartment lock - just gently
press the rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the luggage compartment - lift the handle. Using too
much force may damage the electrical
contact for the rubber panel.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlocking with the remote control key
• Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
For information on privacy locking, see
page 47.
The boot lid is held closed by an electrically
controlled lock. To open:
1. Push down gently on the wide rubberised
outer pressure plate under the outer handle
- the lock plunger is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
the tailgate.
The alarm for the boot lid can be disarmed* and
the boot lid unlocked and opened on its own
button.
by using the remote control key's
The lock indicator on the instrument panel
stops flashing which indicates that not all of the
car is locked and the alarm's* level and move-
56
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
ment sensors and the sensors for opening the
boot lid are disconnected.
Unlocking the car from inside
02
The doors remain locked and armed.
The boot lid can be opened in two
different ways
One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but
remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and lift
the boot lid.
The boot lid can be opened manually with the
key blade if the car's battery is discharged - the
boot lid cannot then be opened with the lighting panel button.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and the
lock plunger is disengaged at which the boot
lid opens about a centimetre - lift the outer
handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could
prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the
lock plunger.
To unlock/open the boot lid:
Unlocking with the key blade
NOTE
•
•
Unlock the boot lid by turning the key blade
approximately a quarter turn anticlockwise
as illustrated.
3. Refit the cover.
Locking with the remote control key
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked
with 2 presses, automatic relocking
does not take place because the boot
lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed
manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been
closed it is unlocked and the alarm is
not armed - relock it and re-arm the
alarm with the remote control key's lock
.
button
Prize loose the lock cylinder's cover.
Press the lighting panel button (1) - the lock
plunger releases and the boot lid is opened
a few centimetres.
• Press the remote control key's button for
locking,
, see page 43.
The lock indicator on the instrument panel
starts flashing, which means that the car is
locked and the alarm* has been activated.
Prize gently with the key blade.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
Deadlocks * 1
02
Temporary deactivation
Deadlocks means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents
doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately
10 second delay after the doors have been
locked.
2. Select Activate once.
> The instrument panel display shows the
message Reduced guard See
manual and the deadlocks function is
switched off when the car is locked.
or
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
OK MENU
Knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 127).
1
58
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select Ask when exiting.
> Each time the engine is switched off the
centre console display screen shows
the message OK MENU reduces
protection until engine is started.
EXIT to cancel - then select one of the
following alternatives:
If you want to switch off deadlocks
Press ENTER and lock the car. (Note that
the alarm's movement and tilt detectors*
are switched off at the same time, see
page 61.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the message
Full guard at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors are re-engaged.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
If you do not want to change the locking
system
Press EXIT and lock the car.
02
NOTE
•
Remember that the car's alarm is armed
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
59
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
Manual blocking of the rear doors
02
The child safety locks prevent children from
opening a rear door from the inside.
WARNING
Each rear door has two knob controls - do
not mix up the child safety lock with the
mechanical door lock, see page 54.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
• windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel
• doors cannot be opened from inside.
NOTE
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors*
and power windows
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see page 46.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
Control panel driver's door.
60
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The child safety locks are activated/deactivated in all key positions (see page 74 and up
to 2 minutes after the remote control key has
been removed from the ignition switch. If a
door is opened within this time, the function is
deactivated.
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows the message Rear child locks Activated and
the button's lamp illuminates when the
locks are active.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
• a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is opened
• a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
Arming the alarm
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
Alarm indicator
Press the remote control key unlock button.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
• the battery's cable is disconnected
• the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the information display shows a message. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
alarm disarmed unintentionally.
NOTE
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the
airflow from the air vents so that they are not
pointing upwards in the passenger compartment.
02
Disarming the alarm
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered
if the car is left with a window or the sunroof
open or if the passenger compartment
heater is used.
Press the remote control key lock button.
Same LED as lock indicator, see page 43.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – Alarm not armed
• The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) – Alarm has been triggered.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the boot lid is opened within
2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following happens:
• A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
battery which works independently of the
car battery.
02
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the alarm sensors for the bonnet
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement
sensor, see the previous section Reduced
alarm level.
1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be switched off with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged, the car can be disarmed and the
engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in the car or during transport
on a car train or a car ferry - the movement and
tilt sensors can be temporarily deactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 58.
62
2. Arm the alarm, see page 61.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms forward and back at backrest height.
> A siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors in the doors
1. Arm the alarm, see page 61.
2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door using the key
blade.
4. Open the driver's door.
> A siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 61. Remain in the
car and lock the doors with the button on
the remote control key.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard.
> A siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
02 Locks and alarm
02
63
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 66
Key positions.......................................................................................... 74
Seats....................................................................................................... 76
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 80
Lighting................................................................................................... 81
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 90
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 92
Compass*................................................................................................ 97
Power sunroof*....................................................................................... 98
Alcoguard*............................................................................................ 100
Starting the engine................................................................................ 104
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 106
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 107
All-wheel drive – AWD*......................................................................... 112
Foot brake............................................................................................. 113
Parking brake........................................................................................ 115
HomeLinkŸ *.......................................................................................... 118
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
03
Left-hand drive.
66
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
81,
84, 124,
146
Control for infotainment
and menu control
127,
203, 244
Control panel for climate
control
135
Cruise control
151, 155
Gear selector
107
Horn, airbags
22, 80
69, 73
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*
150
Combined instrument
panel
Wipers and washing
90, 91
Menu, audio and phone
control
127,
204, 232,
244
Steering wheel adjustment
80
Start/stop button
104
Bonnet opener
286
Ignition switch
74
Parking brake
115
Display for infotainment
and menus
127,
202, 244
Seat adjustment*
77
Door handle
–
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and boot lid
56, 81,
253
Control panel
54, 60,
92, 94
Hazard warning flashers
84
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
Right-hand drive.
68
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Information displays
Function
Page
Function
Page
Display for infotainment
and menus
127,
202, 244
Steering wheel adjustment
80
Ignition switch
74
Start/stop button
104
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
81,
84, 124,
146
Cruise control
151, 155
Gear selector
107
Combined instrument
panel
69, 73
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*
150
Horn, airbags
22, 80
127,
204, 232,
244
Control panel for climate
control
135
Menu, audio and phone
control
Control for infotainment
and menu control
127,
203, 244
Wipers and washing
90, 91
Hazard warning flashers
84
Door handle
–
Bonnet opener
286
Control panel
54, 60,
92, 94
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and boot lid
56, 81,
253
Seat adjustment*
77
Parking brake
115
03
The information displays show information on
some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control,
trip computer and messages. The information
is shown with text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the functions that use the information displays.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Meters
Indicator, information and warning
symbols
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator and information symbols
Symbol
03
Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Meters in the combined instrument panel.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
146, and Refuelling, page 253.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning
symbols1
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Engine preheater (diesel)
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
1
70
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 287.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol
Specification
Left-hand direction indicators
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located
on the driver's side.
Stability system
Right-hand direction indicators
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the
READ button, or clear automatically after a
while.
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Main beam On
Engine preheater (diesel)
Left/right-hand direction indicators
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating occurs when the temperature
is below 2 °C. The car can be started once the
symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with
the READ button, see page 124, or it disappears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
03
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Indicator and warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
``
71
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol
Specification
Fault in brake system
to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
Warning
03
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
287 and 288.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol
flashes during application, and then changes
over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.
72
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
see page 291.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
Airbags – SRS
• If both symbols extinguish, continue
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
• If the symbols remain illuminated, check
driving.
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 291. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated,
the car can be driven, with great care, to
a workshop to have the brake system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illuminated at the same time, there is a risk that
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 124. The warning symbol can
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Trip meter
Clock
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
03
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using the READ button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or boot lid is
not closed properly then the information or
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory text message in the combined
instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet
or boot lid, whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
2
Trip meter and controls.
Clock and setting knob.
Display for trip meter
Controls for setting the clock.
Controls for switching between trip meters
T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip
meters.
Information display for showing the time.
The meters are used to measure short distances.
One short press on the control switches
between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long
press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active
trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the
display.
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set
the time. The set time is shown in the information display.
The clock can be temporarily replaced by a
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
page 124.
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Insert and remove the remote control
key
03
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may
jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
With the remote control key fully inserted into
the ignition switch - Briefly press START/
STOP ENGINE.
Do not press the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade, see page 46.
Key position II
Withdraw the key
Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,
then pull it out.
Functions
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key.
NOTE
The remote control key's 3 different key positions can be reached without the need to start
the engine. The table shows the functions
available in each key position.
For cars with keyless function*, see
page 50.
Insert the key
Hold the end of the remote control key with the
detachable key blade and insert the key in the
ignition switch. Then press the key in the lock
up to its end position.
NOTE
To reach key position I or II without starting
the engine - do not depress the brake/
clutch pedal when the following operations
are carried out.
Key position 0
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position.
74
Key position I
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
With the remote control key fully inserted into
the ignition switch - Press START/STOP
ENGINE for about 2 seconds.
Back to key position 0
To return to key position 0 from position I or II
- Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Position
0
Function
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. The
steering lock is deactivated. The
audio system can be used.
I
Sunroof*, power windows, 12 V
socket in the passenger compartment, RTI*, phone*, ventilation
fan, ECC and windscreen wipers
can be used.
II
The headlamps come on. Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for
5 seconds. All equipment operates apart from heated seats and
rear window defroster, which only
work when the engine is running.
03
For information on the audio system's functions with remote control key removed, see
page 200.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off the
engine, see page 104.
Towing
For important information about the remote
control key during towing, see page 266.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving. Make
sure that the seat is in locked position in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
03
Lowering the front seat backrest
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
1
76
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Control panel for power seat*.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Also applies to power seat.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Power seat*
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine
is running.
Seat with memory function*
2. Hold the button depressed to store settings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
03
Key memory* in remote control key2
The positions of the driver's seat and the door
mirrors3 are stored in the key memory when the
car is locked with the remote control key.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Preparations
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con2
3
When the car is unlocked with the same remote
control key it was locked with and the driver's
For key memory for keyless drive, see page 52.
Only if the car is equipped with power seat and retractable power door mirrors.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
03 Your driving environment
Seats
door is opened, the driver's seat and also the
door mirrors automatically adopt the positions
stored in the key memory.
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
NOTE
03
The seat and the door mirrors do not move
if they are already set the relevant position.
It is also possible to use the key memory by
pressing the unlock button on the remote control key when the driver's door is open.
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory
Position of door mirrors and driver's seat in
key. For a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
NOTE
The key memory in the two remote control
keys and the seat's three memories are
completely independent of each other.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the buttons to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
78
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under
the seat during adjustment. Ensure that
none of the backseat passengers will be
trapped.
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of the
head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
Heated seats
For heated seats, see page 137.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING
WARNING
Take hold of the backrests and make sure
they are locked properly after opening them
out in order to prevent injury under hard
braking or in the event of an accident.
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the outer
seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
03
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.
The backrest is in two sections, they can be
folded forward, together or separately.
1. Pull on the required handle. They are
located just inside the hatch opening.
2. Fold the backrest forward.
Lower the centre head restraint fully if the
backrest's wide section shall be lowered.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the
head restraints must be moved forward
slightly so as not to make contact with the
seat cushion.
1. The remote control key must be in position
I or II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visibility.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting
WARNING
Horn
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before
driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see
page 150.
03
G021138
Keypads*
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Horn.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
Keypads in the steering wheel.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cruise control, see page 151
Adaptive cruise control, see page 155
Audio and phone control, see page 204.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Light switches
Main/dipped beam
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
03
1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote
control key in position I.
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog lamp
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Cars with Xenon headlamps* have automatic
headlamp levelling and therefore do not have
the thumbwheel.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Light switches
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 74.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
1
Not available for cars equipped with Xenon headlamps*.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Position
Specification
AutomaticA/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
03
Dipped beam. Main beam and
main beam flash work in this
position.
A
Applies to certain markets.
NOTE
Main beam can only be activated in position
.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash.
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
In position
dipped beam is always activated automatically when the engine is running
or when the remote control key is in position
II.
Main beam
Main beam can only be activated when the
. Actiheadlamp control is in position
vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel to the end
position and release. Alternatively, the main
beam can be deactivated by a light press of the
stalk switch toward the steering wheel.
When main beam has been activated the symilluminates in the combined instrubol
ment panel.
Dipped beam
When the engine is started, dipped beam is
activated automatically2 if the headlamp con. If necessary, autotrol is in position
matic dipped beam for this position can be
2
82
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights - ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
symbol illuminates in the
function the
combined instrument panel at the same time
as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Symbol
Display
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
Specification
The system
is disengaged. Visit
a workshop
if the message
remains.
Volvo recommends
that you
contact an
authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function3 can be deactivated/activated in
the menu system MY CAR under My S60
Active bending lights or under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
bending lights. For a description of the menu
system, see page 127.
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see
page 86.
3
Position/parking lamps
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking. For information on the Emergency
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
flashers, see page 113.
Rear fog lamp
03
Headlamp control in position for position/parking
lamps.
Turn the headlamp control to the centre position (number plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
Rear position lamps also come on when the
boot lid is opened in order to alert anybody
behind.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and
can only be switched on in combination with
main/dipped beam.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
on the combined
indicator symbol
instrument panel and the light in the button illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
Activated on delivery from the factory.
``
83
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary
between different countries.
automatically when the car is driven off again
or the button is depressed. For more information on Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers, see page 113.
Direction indicators/flashers
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
03
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 70.
Hazard warning flashers
Interior lighting
Direction indicators/flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in
the combined instrument panel flash when the
hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car brakes so suddenly
that the emergency brake lights are activated
and speed is below 30 km/h. They remain on
when the car has stopped and are deactivated
84
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Triple
indicator. For a description of the menu
system, see page 127.
G021149
Short flash sequence
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
• the engine has been switched off and the
remote control key is in position 0
• the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Rear roof lighting
Courtesy lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
• the car is unlocked with the remote control
Glovebox lighting
• the engine is switched off and the remote
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 197, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
The switch for passenger compartment lighting has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
• Off – right-hand side depressed, automatic
key or key blade, see pages 43 or 46
control key is in position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
03
• the engine is started
• the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.
lighting deactivated.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting activated.
G021150
• On – left-hand side depressed, passenger
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
compartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the passenger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
following.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
``
85
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
the same way as with main beam flash, see
page 81.
Active Xenon headlamps*
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
The car must be stationary with the engine running when the headlamp pattern is shifted
between right and left-hand traffic.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Light
settings.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.
2. Select between Temporary RH traffic
and Temporary LH traffic.
G021151
03
Adjusting headlamp pattern
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 43, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1,
see page 89:
When the function is activated with the remote
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and
courtesy lighting are switched on.
86
• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
G021152
The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 127
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pattern will also better illuminate the verge.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
lens)
• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
• D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the
right distance from the edge of the headlamp lens using the illustration, see
page 88, and the dimensions in the following list:
03
• Template A: horizontal line approx.
80 mm, vertical line approx. 20 mm
• Template B: horizontal line approx.
80 mm, vertical line approx. 4 mm
• Template C: horizontal line approx.
120 mm, vertical line approx. 4 mm
• Template D: horizontal line approx.
85 mm, vertical line approx. 15 mm
``
87
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Aligning the templates
03
Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
88
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Templates for halogen headlamps
03
89
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Windscreen wipers1
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
03
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
1
90
Service position wiper blade
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
button the rain sensor symbol
is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades see see
page 299 and 312.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.)
Rain sensor*
Deactivating
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Replacing the wiper blades see page 299, service position, wiper blade see page 299 and filling washer fluid see page 300.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the butor move the stalk switch down to
ton
another wiper program.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running
or the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once
the stalk switch has been released.
03
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
Washing the headlamps and windows
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Washing function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
General
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the
highlighted area in the above illustration).
Laminated glass
03
The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
The windscreen and the side windows* have
laminated glass.
Power windows
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
page 313.
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the defroster to
remove ice from the mirrors, see
page 95.
A
40 mm
B
80 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heatreflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of the
92
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 60.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers
is in danger of becoming trapped in any way
when closing the windows from the driver's
door.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the windows, in particular when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car, remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Operating
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. Each control
panel in the other doors can only control its
own respective power window. The power windows can only be controlled with one control
panel at a time.
In order that the power windows can be used
the remote control key must be in position I or
II. After the car has been running the power
windows can be operated for several minutes
even when the remote control key has been
removed, but not however after the door has
been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to override the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive
closing interruptions the pinch protection will
be forced and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to
close by continually holding the button pulled
up.
NOTE
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
03
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or from
inside with central locking, see pages 44 and
55
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to raise the window to its end position and
hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that
pinch protection works.
``
93
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Sun blind*
Door mirrors
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1. Press the buttons L and R simultaneously
(the remote control key must be at least in
key position I).
03
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.
There is a sun blind built into the rear parcel
shelf.
Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the
roof clip using the two hooks for the blind.
> The spring force in the blind keeps the
hooks in position.
When the sun blind is not in use - unhook it,
hold onto the handle and allow the blind to roll
up slowly.
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirrors are the wide angle type for optimum surveillance. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Storing the position*
The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the mirrors
and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory Position
of door mirrors and driver's seat in key. For
a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Angling the door mirror when parking1
Automatic retraction when locking
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
mirrors. For a description of the menu system,
see page 127.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the driver
can see the side of the road when parking for
example. When reverse gear is disengaged the
mirror automatically returns to its original position after a while.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror and Tilt right mirror respectively.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
1
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
03
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 85.
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the
ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the
battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is
switched off automatically after a certain time.
The rear window is demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +9 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY
CAR under Settings Climate settings
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 77.
``
95
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Automatic rear defroster. Select between
ON or OFF. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.
Interior rearview mirror
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
not available in mirrors with automatic dimming.
The compass* can only be specified for rearview mirrors with automatic dimming, see
page 97.
03
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
Operation
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For optimum calibration - switch off all electrical equipment (climate control system,
wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for
example) until the character C is shown.
4. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.
5. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
03
6. Wait until the display resumes showing the
character C.
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further
2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in ignition position II, see
page 74. To deactivate/activate the compass press in the button on the underside of the mirror using a paper clip for example.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass
G030295
Calibration
Magnetic zones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
General
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at
the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or
II is required for the sunroof to be opened.
Vertical opening
Closing
Horizontal opening
Close manually by pushing the control forwards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed position
as long as the button is kept depressed.
G028899
03
Open manually by pulling the control backwards to the point of resistance for manual
opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open
position as long as the button is kept
depressed.
WARNING
G021343
Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed.
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual.
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched off
by removing the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
Closing, automatic
Opening
For maximum sunroof opening, move the control back to the position for automatic opening
and release.
98
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by removing the
remote control key if the driver leaves the
car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is triggered if it is blocked by an object during automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop
and automatically open to the previous position.
03
G021345
Wind deflector
One long press on the lock button closes the
sunroof and all the windows, see pages 43 and
54 . The doors and the boot lid are locked. To
interrupt closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed using the remote
control key, check that no one is in danger
of becoming trapped in any way.
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded
up when the sunroof is in the open position.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
General information on the Alcolock
1. Nozzle for breath test.
The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
2. Switch.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
to drive the car safely.
3. Transmission button.
4. Lamp for battery status.
5. Lamp for result of breath test.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
Before starting the engine
Operation
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
Battery
1. When indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
Lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the
charger in the holder
or connect the
power supply cable
from the glovebox.
Functions
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in which
case, press button (3) to transmit the result
to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
100
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
Result after breath test
Lamp (5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp + Alcoguard Approved
test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content
measured.
Yellow lamp + Alcoguard Approved
test
Red lamp + Disapproved test Wait 1
minute
A
Engine starting possible - measured
alcohol content is
above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
value in forceA.
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in forceA.
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
See also the section entitled General information on the
Alcolock on page 100
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
1
To bear in mind
tion will then be possible, see page 102 section Emergency situation.
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
• Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started - only
recalibration at a workshop1 can clear the message permanently.
03
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Temperature (ºC)
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 — +85
10
–5 — +10
60
–40 — –5
180
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop1 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
display shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. If
calibration is not carried out within these 30
days then normal engine starting will be
blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The display shows Alcoguard insert
power cable. In which case, connect the
power supply cable from the glovebox and wait
until indicator lamp (6) is green.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
In extremely cold weather the heating time can
be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Activating the Bypass function
Symbols and display messages
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
In addition to the previously described messages, the combined instrument panel's display can also show the following:
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and
then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after
which the engine can be started.
Emergency situation
03
In the event of an emergency situation, or if the
Alcolock is out of order or has been removed,
it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to
drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
memory, see page 10 in the section,
Recording data.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop1.
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart
possible
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes engine starting possible without new
test.
Alcoguard Service
required
Contact a workshop1.
Alcoguard No signal
Transmission failed send manually with
button (3) or take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid
test
Test failed - take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow
longer
Blowing too short blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow
softer
Blowing too hard blow more gently.
Activating the Emergency function
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the
engine can be started.
After the Bypass function has been activated
the display shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled the whole time while driving and can
only be reset by a workshop1.
The Bypass function can be tested without the
error message being logged - in which case,
carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The error message is cleared when the car is
locked.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop1.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop1.
1
102
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Blow
harder
Blowing too weak blow harder.
Alcoguard wait
Preheating
Heating not finished
- wait for text Alcoguard Blow 5 seconds.
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
103
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Petrol and diesel engines
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine has
started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (diesel up to 60 seconds).
03
If the engine does not start - try again by holding in the START/STOP ENGINE button until
the engine starts.
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key
and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade, see page 46.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position.
Note that if the car is equipped with an
alcolock then a breath test must first be
approved before the engine can be started,
see page 100.
1
104
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car especially if there are children in the car. For
information on how the key is removed from
the ignition switch, see page 74.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is so that the emissions
system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless drive
Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel
engines. For more information on Keyless
drive, see page 50.
NOTE
One precondition for starting the car is that
one of the car's remote control keys with the
keyless drive* function is located inside the
passenger compartment or the cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key with
the Keyless drive* function from the car
while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine - Press START/STOP
ENGINE.
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the
gear selector is not in a position P or if the car
is moving - Press twice or hold the button
depressed until the engine stops.
Steering lock
The steering lock opens when the START/
STOP ENGINE button is depressed after the
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
remote control key has been pressed into the
ignition switch.
The steering lock is activated when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
Key positions
03
For information on the remote control key's different key positions, see page 74
105
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
Jump starting
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover,
see page 302.
6. Connect the red jump lead to the battery's
positive terminal
.
7. Connect one end of the black jump lead to
.
the donor battery's negative terminal
03
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
The following points are recommended when
using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk
of an explosion:
1. Insert the remote control key in key position 0, see page 74.
2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch
off the donor car's engine in the other car
and ensure that the cars do not touch one
another.
4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive
.
terminal on the donor battery
106
8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing
point, (right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head)
. Check that
the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so
that there are no sparks during the starting
procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the
engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle (1500 rpm).
10. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery. Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of
sparks forming.
11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and
then the red.
Make sure that none of the clamps on the
black jump lead comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if you connect a jump lead
incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery
explode. The battery contains sulphuric
acid, which can cause serious burns. If the
acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or
clothing, flush with large quantities of water.
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical
attention immediately.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Manual gearbox
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Gear positions
Parking position (P)
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
• Start from neutral position N and only
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4 5 or 6, see
page 69.
engage reverse gear R when the car is stationary.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic*
03
Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Activate the electric
parking brake by pressing the button, see
page 115.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
Reverse (R)
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
Neutral position (N)
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in position N.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them.
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear
positions.
Drive (D)
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-)
03
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever to the side from position D to the end
position at +/–. The information display shifts
the indication from D to one of the figures 1 –
6, which is equivalent to the gear that is
engaged just then, see page 69.
• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its rest position between
+ and –.
or
• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
1
108
Only models D5 and T6.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Geartronic - Winter mode
• Move the lever to the side to the end posi-
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
tion at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or backwards in its (-+/–) position. The information
display then shifts the indication from S to
show which of the gears 1-6 is engaged.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear lever from the D position to the end
position at +/– - the instrument panel display shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards + (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)1
The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for
the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to
a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to
the side from D position to the end position at
+/–. The information display shifts the indication from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
Deactivating the automatic gear selector
inhibitor
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
03
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 74.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
G021351
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 74.
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and open the
hatch.
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key
blade down and hold (For information on
the key blade, see page 46.)
Move the gear selector from the P position.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
``
109
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Automatic gearbox, Powershift*2
the Geartronic automatic transmission, described in the previous section.
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that
the pressure in the brake system remains for
several seconds while the foot is moved from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before
setting off or reversing uphill.
03
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear
positions.
Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox
that has double mechanical clutch discs in
contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox.
A conventional automatic gearbox has a
hydraulic torque converter that transfers power
from the engine to the gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
2
110
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload
protection that is activated if it becomes too
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the information display shows a
message. The transmission can also overheat
Only 4-cyl. model 2.0T.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
hitched. The transmission cools down when
the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car
and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until
there is a moderate distance to the traffic
ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then
wait another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
could then overheat.
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a
message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
Symbol
Display
Driving characteristics
Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car
stationary using the foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park safely
Significant pulling in the car's traction.
Transmission overheated. Park the car
immediately in a safe manner.A
Transm. cooling let engine run
A
No drive due to overheated gearbox.
03
Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the
gear lever in the N or P position until the
message clears.
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the transmission
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated intentionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
so high that the power transmission
between engine and gearbox is temporarily
halted in order to prevent the clutch from
malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and
is stationary until gearbox temperature has
cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 124.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
111
03 Your driving environment
All-wheel drive – AWD*
All Wheel Drive is always available
03
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all
four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best grip
on the current road surface. This provides the
best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of
power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
112
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 326.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is
engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the brake
pedal.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after the
car has been washed. Carry this out by braking
gently during a short period while en route.
03
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking.
After the car's speed has been slowed below
10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to
the normal constant glow - while at the same
time the hazard warning flashers are activated,
and they flash until the driver changes engine
speed with the accelerator pedal or they are
deactivated with their button, see page 84.
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and
so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the
driver's braking style and increases brake force
as necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is
engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when
the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
``
113
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol
03
Specification
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system
checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
114
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Parking brake, electric
Applying the parking brake
the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking
is interrupted.
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the parking brake is being applied. The noise
can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes over
to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds
above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the
braking procedure.
03
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
Parking brake control.
Low battery voltage
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 106.
2. Press the control.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
• When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the
wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the
parking brake when parking on a slope leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold
the car in all situation.
The symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes until the parking
brake is fully applied. When the symbol illuminates the parking brake is applied.
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by depressing the control. When the control is released or
``
115
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Disengaging the parking brake
03
2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accelerator.
ing off. Release the control when the engine
achieves traction.
Cars with automatic gearbox
Cars with Keyless drive function
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
Release manually by pressing the
START/STOP ENGINE button, then depress
the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
Symbols
3. Pull the control.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
Parking brake control.
2. Start the engine.
Cars with manual gearbox
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends the use of the brake pedal.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
116
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The
parking brake is released immediately on
cars with automatic gearbox when the
accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear
selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-
Symbol
Specification
Read the message on the information display
A flashing symbol indicates that
the parking brake is applied. If
the symbol flashes in any other
situation then this means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Messages
Parking brake Service required - A fault has
arisen. Visit a workshop if the fault persists - a
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before the fault has
been rectified then the wheels must be turned
as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged
(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be
in position P (automatic gearbox).
03
Replacing the brake linings
Park brake not fully released - A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released.
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A warning signal
sounds if you pull away with this error message.
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Parking brake not applied - A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply and release. Visit a workshop if the
message remains - a Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with
manual gearbox when the car is driven at low
speed with the door open in order to alert the
driver that the parking brake may have been
unintentionally disengaged.
117
03 Your driving environment
HomeLinkŸ *
General
NOTE
HomeLinkŸ is designed not to work if the car
is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when switching to
another car).
03
Delete the button programming when the
car is to be sold.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in
cars fitted with HomeLinkŸ. This may have
an adverse effect on its function.
HomeLinkŸ is a programmable remote control
which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLinkŸ is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLinkŸ panel consists of three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp.
Operation
When HomeLinkŸ is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate
the garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator lamp illuminates for the time that the button is kept depressed.
NOTE
If the ignition is not activated, HomeLinkŸ
will work for 30 minutes after the driver's
door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLinkŸ.
118
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
If HomeLinkŸ is used to operate a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the
vicinity of the door or gate while it is in
motion.
Do not use the HomeLinkŸ remote control
for any garage door that does not have
safety stop and safety reverse. The garage
door must react immediately when it
detects that something is preventing its
movement, and stop directly and reverse. A
garage door without these characteristics
could cause personal injury. For further
information - contact the supplier via the
Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in
HomeLinkŸ and must not be carried out when
only one individual button is being reprogrammed.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flashing indicates that HomeLinkŸ is set in
"learn mode" and is ready to be programmed.
2. Position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLinkŸ. Monitor the indicator lamp.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLinkŸ *
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLinkŸ depends on the programming
of the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different distances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "rolling code". The garage door, gate or similar is not activated when the programmed HomeLinkŸ button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLinkŸ simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flashing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
5. Locate the "programming button1" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have difficulty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLinkŸ and
watching the indicator lamp:
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLinkŸ button is depressed.
• Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
1
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLinkŸ, while the "programming button" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on
HomeLinkŸ and do not release until step 3
has been completed.
03
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkŸ
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLinkŸ. Monitor the indicator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different distances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
119
03 Your driving environment
HomeLinkŸ *
• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLinkŸ button is depressed.
03
• Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This process is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "rolling code". The garage door, gate or similar is not activated when the programmed HomeLinkŸ button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLinkŸ, while the "programming button" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLinkŸ, not for individual
buttons.
5. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have difficulty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
2
120
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
> HomeLinkŸ is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be programmed once more, see page 118.
03 Your driving environment
03
121
Menus and messages...........................................................................
Menu system MY CAR.........................................................................
Climate control......................................................................................
Fuel-driven engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*...................................................
Additional heater*..................................................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................
Adapting driving characteristics...........................................................
Cruise control*......................................................................................
Speed limiter ........................................................................................
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................
Distance Alert*......................................................................................
City Safety™.........................................................................................
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......................................................
Driver Alert System – DAC*...................................................................
Driver Alert System - LDW*...................................................................
Park assist syst*....................................................................................
Park assist camera*..............................................................................
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................
122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
124
127
132
142
145
146
148
150
151
153
155
165
168
172
179
182
185
188
191
195
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Combined instrument panel
Menu overview
Message
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
To empty fuel tank
Average
Instantaneous
Average speed
Current speed1
04
Engine oil level*
Tyre pressure Calibration *
Information display and controls for menus.
READ – access to message list and message confirmation.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
page 74. If a message appears then this must
be acknowledged with READ for the menus to
be shown.
124
Park heat timer 1/2*
Park vent timer 1/2*
Park timer mode*
Direct start Park heat*
Direct start Park el.heat*
Direct start Park vent*
Text message in the information display.
When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.
Press READ to acknowledge and browse
between the messages.
Additional heat auto*
Rest heat start*
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular
service. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Transmission
oil Change needed
Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check the car as soon
as possible.
Stop engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service.
Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
The timing is determined by the number of
kilometres driven, number of months since the
last service, engine running time and oil grade.
Transmission
performance
low
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until the
message clearsB.
Service urgentA
Service
requiredA
See manualA
1
Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check the car immediately.
Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check the car as soon
as possible.
Read the owner's manual.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals
are not followed then
the warranty does not
cover any damaged
parts. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop for service.
04
If shown repeatedly:
Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsB.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Critical fault. Stop the
car immediately in a
safe manner. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshopB.
Only certain markets.
``
125
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
A
B
126
Message
Specification
Temporarily
OFFA
A function has been
temporarily switched
off and is reset automatically while driving
or after starting again.
Low battery
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the battery.
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 110.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu system MY CAR
General information about MY CAR
Operation
MY CAR is a menu system where many of the
car's functions are handled.
Centre console controls
Steering wheel keypad*
Some functions also need to be handled while
driving, so these also have direct buttons on
the centre console - a maximum of 20 button
spaces are available.
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
some of the centre console buttons or with the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
04
Some functions are standard, others are
optional. The range varies depending on market.
The keypad may vary depending on market.
Centre console controls for menu navigation.
Press MY CAR to open the menus for MY
CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Turn to scroll up/down among the menu
options.
Press EXIT to go back a step in the menu
structure. A long press leads out of the
current menu system to the Main menu.
Turn the thumbwheel to scroll up/down
among the menu options - Press the
thumbwheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Press EXIT to go back a step in the menu
structure. A long press leads out of the
current menu system to the symbols for the
car's Main menus.
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right of
the centre console display screen. Search
paths to the menu system functions are described in this manual in the following form:
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu system MY CAR
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
Menus in MY CAR
The following is an example of how a function
can be accessed and adjusted using the steering wheel keypad:
04
TEL – BluetoothŸ handsfree*
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR.
MY CAR - Settings which affect the
car's driving characteristics
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,
with the thumbwheel (1) and then press the
thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
CAM - Park Assist Camera*
3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
• Select a group and press OK/MENU.
Symbol menu for the car's Main menus.
4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the
thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the
thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
functions opens.
6. Choose between the options All doors
and Driver door, then all and press the
thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the
option's empty box.
Shortcut menu and Main menus.
Main menu
The car's functions are grouped and distributed over 6 symbols from which the various
settings can be made. A long EXIT shows this
Symbol menu.
The following group symbols are available:
7. Exit the programming by backing out of the
menus incrementally with short presses on
EXIT (2) or with one long press.
The procedure is exactly the same with centre
console buttons OK MENU (2) and EXIT (4)
and steering wheel (3).
128
MEDIA - Media
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NAV - GPS navigator*
RADIO - Radio
Shortcut menus - shortcuts
Under each group symbol there is an additional
number of menus. Unique menu environments
are described in detail in each respective section.
All settings that are connected with driving the
car are grouped under MY CAR.
Shortcuts to some of the most common functions are grouped under the MY CAR option
My S60.
Depending on market, the car's equipment
level and options, the Shortcut menu differs
from car to car - the easiest way is to key forward the Shortcut menu and see what it contains.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu system MY CAR
MY CAR – Settings
Most of the main menus are presented
here with all the appropriate submenus
and references to the relevant sections
of the manual where more information is available.
Some main menus shown here have no submenus but these are instead presented in their
entirety in the relevant sections of the manual
with detailed function descriptions.
For more information, see page 44 and 52 and
55.
For more information, see page 58 and 62.
Side mirror settings
Fold mirrors
For more information, see page 95.
For more information, see page 77 and 94.
Light settings
All doors
Driver door, then all
Keyless entry
All doors
Any door
Doors on same side
Both front doors
For more information, see page 85.
Door lock confirmation light
For more information, see page 42.
04
Daytime running lights
For more information, see page 81.
Temporary LH traffic
Door lock confirmation light
Doors unlock
90 sec
Ask when exiting
Car key memory
Automatic door locking
60 sec
Activate once
Tilt right mirror
Lock settings
30 sec
Reduced Guard
Tilt left mirror
Car settings
Home safe light duration
Door unlock confirmation light
For more information, see page 42.
Approach light duration
Off
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
For more information, see page 44 and 86.
Temporary RH traffic
For more information, see page 86.
Active bending lights
For more information, see page 82.
Tyre pressure system
Warns if tyre pressure is too low
Calibrate tyre pressure
For more information, see page 278.
Steering wheel force
High
``
129
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu system MY CAR
Medium
For more information, see page 148.
Language
Low
City safety
Selects language for menu texts.
For more information, see page 150.
For more information, see page 10 and 168.
Show help text
Reset car settings
BLIS
This option resets the menu system to the original factory settings in Car settings.
For more information, see page 191.
Explanatory text for the display screen's current content is shown if this option is selected.
Driver support system
04
Distance Alert
For more information, see page 165.
Driver alert
Collision warning
For more information, see page 179.
Long
Normal
Short
Warning sound
For more information, see page 172.
Lane departure warning
Lane departure warning
Set/change time
For more information, see page 73.
Time format
12 h
24 h
Screensaver
For more information, see page 182.
DSTC
If no screensaver is required - Deselect.
Increased sensitivity
130
System settings
The display screen's current contents are
replaced by another picture, if this option is
selected. Current screen content will return if
one of the controls (1) - (4) is touched, see
page 127.
On at start-up
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km
Collision Warning
Warning distance
Distance and fuel units
For more information on the trip computer, see
page 146.
Temperature unit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Selects the unit for the display of outside temperature and setting of the climate control system.
Volume levels
Voice output volume
Park assist front volume
Park assist rear volume
Phone ringing volume
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu system MY CAR
Reset system options
This option resets the menu system to the original factory settings in System settings.
Audio settings
For more information on all the submenus and
possible settings, see page 200.
For more information, see page 206.
Volvo On Call*
Described in a separate manual.
Information
Number of keys
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjustment
High
Normal
Low
Recirculation timer
Automatic rear defroster
Interior air quality system
Reset climate settings
For more information, see page 42.
04
VIN number
For more information, see page 320.
DivX® VOD code
For more information, see page 219.
Bluetooth software version in car
For more information, see page 225.
Map and software version
See also separate manual on RTI and GPS
navigation.
This option resets the menu system to the original factory settings in Climate settings.
For more information, see page 132.
Favourites (FAV)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
General
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be on.
04
Sensor location
of the dashboard.
• The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
The system includes a sun sensor1 which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
1
132
NOTE
To avoid misting, do not block the vents furthest back on the parcel shelf with clothing
or other objects.
• The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
• The humidity sensor* is located by the interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
etc. in and around the car.
Vents in the parcel shelf
• The sun sensor1 is located on the top side
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in
temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
Side windows and sunroof*
To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows, and sunroof* if specified, should be closed.
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Ice and snow
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by primarily using the defroster function.
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.
Fault tracing and repair
Only applies to ECC.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Engage a workshop that has authorisation for
the fault tracing and repair of the climate control system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Refrigerant
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
The air conditioning system contains a refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlorine,
which means that it is harmless to the ozone
layer. Engage a workshop that has authorisation for filling/changing refrigerant to carry out
the work. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
This option keeps the passenger compartment
clear of allergy and asthma inducing substances. For more information on CZIP, see the
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example to
quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 55.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may be
necessary to replace the filter more often.
The following is included:
• An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air. The
function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when
one of the passenger compartment doors
is opened. The amount of time the fan runs
is reduced gradually due to reduced need
up until the car is 4 years old.
• The air quality system IAQS is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
The materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and they contribute to making
the passenger compartment easier to keep
clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable
and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo, see page 314.
04
Menu settings
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for four of climate control
system's functions via the centre console. For
general information about menu navigation,
see page 127.
• Fan speed in automatic mode*, see
page 138.
• Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air, see page 139.
NOTE
NOTE
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
• Automatic rear window defrosting, see
In cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be
changed after 15 000 km or once per year
depending on whichever occurs first. However, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars
without CZIP the IAQS filter must be
changed at the normal service.
page 95.
• Air quality system IAQS*, see page 139
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu system in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Settings Climate settings Reset
climate settings.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
133
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution
Air vents in the dashboard
Air vents in the door pillars
04
The incoming air is divided between
20 different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see
page 140.
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment
to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear
seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
134
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
04
Temperature control, left-hand side
Temperature control, right-hand side
Heated front seats, left-hand side
Recirculation
Max. defroster
AUTO
Fan
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 95
Heated front seats, right-hand side
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
135
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
04
Fan
Heated front seats, right-hand side
Heated front seats, left-hand side
Temperature control
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 95
Recirculation
136
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Operating the controls
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no lamps illuminate.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no lamps illuminate.
Heated seats*
Fan
WARNING
Front seats
The heated seat should not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive temperature increase because of sensory loss or for
any reason have difficulty in managing to
use the control of the heated seat. Otherwise, burn injuries may arise.
NOTE
If the fan is fully disengaged the air conditioning is not engaged which may result in a
risk of misting windows.
Fan knob for ECC*
Rear seat
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
display.
Fan knob for ETC
One press on the button gives
the highest heat level - three
orange lamps illuminate in the
centre console display (see
figure above).
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level – two orange lamps illuminate
in the display.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one orange lamp illuminates in the display.
04
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed.
Press the button once for the highest heat level
– three lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level –
two lamps illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one lamp illuminates.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
137
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution
Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High:
• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
• Normal - Automatic fan control.
• High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 127.
04
Air distribution - defroster
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre
console display.
The Auto function automatically regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribution.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disengaged
when AUTO is pressed. The display shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under: Settings
1
138
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob. For
ECC* the temperature for the
driver's side and the passenger side can be set separately.
AUTO1
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the display (see figure below)
and an arrow in front of each part of the figure
shows the air distribution that is selected. For
more information on air distribution, see
page 140.
Temperature control
Only applies to ECC.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
AC – Air conditioning on/off
When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the
system's automatic function.
This way, incoming air is
cooled and dehumidified.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off
the air conditioning is disconnected. Other
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function is activated
the air conditioning is switched on automatically, so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.
Max. defroster
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flowing to the windows. The
light in the defroster button
illuminates when the function
is active.
The following also takes place in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
• the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
• recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Recirculation
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 127.
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates. The
function is selected to shut
out bad air, exhaust gases
etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no
outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Air quality system IAQS*
04
The air quality system separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment. If the
outside air is contaminated then the air intake
is closed and the air is recirculated.
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Climate
settings Interior air quality system. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 127.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
NOTE
The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in the
passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
04
If the insides of the windows start misting
up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen, the
side and the rear windows should also be
used to demist the windows.
Air distribution table
140
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
The air is not recirculated.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and misting
quickly.
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen, via
defroster vent, and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and humid
climate, (not at too low
fan speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air
flows to the dashboard air
vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling
in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and
to the floor.
to provide cooler air along
the floor or warmer air
higher up in cold weather
or hot, dry weather.
04
141
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Fuel-driven heater
Refuelling
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater is switched
off automatically and a message appears on
the information display. Acknowledge the message by pressing once on the indicator stalk
READ button, see page 143.
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and passenger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
04
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. At -5 °C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50
minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking
heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.
142
Battery and fuel
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check the information display to see that
the parking heater is switched off. When it
is running, the information display shows
Park heat ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
G025102
Specification
Fuel
heater
ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
Timer is
set for
Fuel
heater
The heater's timer
is activated after
the remote control
key has been
removed from the
ignition switch and
leaving the car the engine and
passenger compartment are
heated at the set
time.
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the information symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates while the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.
G025102
For more information on the information display and READ, see page 124.
Heater
stopped
Low battery
Symbol
G025102
Display
The heater has
been stopped by
the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the
engine.
G025102
Symbol
G025102
Operation
Display
Specification
Heater
unavail.
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater
is not possible due
to fuel level being
too low
(approx. 7 litres) this is in order to
facilitate starting
the engine as well
as approx. 50 km
driving.
Park
heater
Service
required
04
Heater not working. Contact a
workshop for
repair. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk
READ button.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
143
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start
Park heat.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
04
With the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
NOTE
The timer can only be programmed when
the remote control key is in key position I,
see page 74 - programming must therefore
be carried out before starting the engine.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat
timer 1.
2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flashing hours setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flashing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
144
After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start
time can be programmed with Park heat timer
2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
Park heat timer 1.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:
1. Press READ.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
Park heat timer 1 or 2.
> The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
> The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop", see
page 144.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
General information about the
additional heater
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
timer function then it can be used as a fueldriven passenger compartment heater, see
page 142.
In cold climate zones1 an additional heater may
be required to obtain the correct operating
temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.
Electric additional heater
Cars with certain petrol engines2 have an electric additional heater integrated into the car's
climate control system.
Fuel-driven additional heater
A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in cars
with diesel engines.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater can be switched off for
short distances if required.
1
2
In a semi-cold1 climate zone diesel-driven cars
have an electric additional heater instead of a
fuel-driven version.
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heat auto.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
04
The heater cannot be controlled manually but
is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside temperatures below 14 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
been reached.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
General
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must
first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated. Acknowledge the
warning message by pressing READ.
To change unit for distance and speed - go to
MY CAR, see page 129.
04
Average speed
Information display and controls.
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel – browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET – resets
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop.
One of the menu options is a blank display - it
also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
Average speed is calculated from the last
resetting. Reset using RESET.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven supplementary and/or parking
heater* has been used.
146
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information
on how you can influence fuel consumption,
see page 12.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel as
soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
Resetting
1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/
100km average.
2. Press and hold RESET for
approx. 1 second to reset the selected
function. If RESET is kept depressed for at
least 3 three seconds then Average speed
and Average are reset simultaneously.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Current speed*1
The instrument panel display shows current
speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated
in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in
mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.
04
1
Only certain markets.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps
the driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
04
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability
to steer the car.
Corner Traction Control – CTC
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing
the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system
intervenes and stabilises the car.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car
may accelerate slower than expected when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an
arcing motorway entrance road to quickly
reach the prevailing traffic speed.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
Active Yaw Control
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
The function serves to stabilise the car and
trailer combination if it begins to snake, see
page 265.
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR
and search in the display screen's menu
system and locate My S60 DSTC. (For
information on the menu system, see
page 127).
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceleration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
engine braking when driving in low gears on
slippery road surfaces.
148
skidding with the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The DSTC system is always activated - it cannot be deactivated.
However, the driver can select the Sport mode,
which allows for a more active driving experience. In Sport mode the system detects
whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows controlled
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Uncheck the symbol and back out of the
menu system.
> The system then allows a more sporty
driving style.
The Sport mode is active until the driver deselects it or until the engine is switched off - after
the engine is started the next time the DSTC
system is back in its normal mode again.
Messages in the information display
DSTC Temporarily OFF means that the system has been temporarily reduced due to
excessive temperature in the brake discs.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
The function is reactivated automatically
when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required system disabled due
to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
> If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
If the symbols
and
are shown at
the same time - read the message on the information display.
appears alone then it may
If the symbol
appear as follows:
• Flashing light means that the system is
now being activated.
• Constant glow for 2 seconds means system check when the engine is started.
• Constant glow after starting the engine or
while driving means that Sport mode has
been activated.
149
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
Active chassis (Four-C)*
Operation
Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled
Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's
driving characteristics can be adjusted. There
are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 128. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
Comfort
04
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable on rough and uneven
road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the
movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Sport
Use the buttons in the centre console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated next time the
engine is started.
Advanced
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum roadholding and rolling in bends is further
minimised.
150
Chassis settings.
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more sporty and is recommended for
more active driving. Steering response is faster
than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during cornering.
This setting is only recommended on very even
and smooth road surfaces.
Steering wheel force and select Low,
Medium or High.
Speed related power steering*
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system
MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
Operation
The cruise control is then activated with
or
, after which the current speed is stored in
the memory - the display text (---) km/h
changes to show the selected speed, e.g. 100
km/h.
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby
mode)
Activating and setting the speed
Switch on the cruise control with one press on
the steering wheel button
- the symbol
is illuminated in the display (5) and the brackets
around (---) km/h show that the cruise control
is set in standby mode.
Press
to temporarily disengage the cruise
control and set it in standby mode - set speed
is shown in brackets in the display (5), e.g.
(100) km/h.
Automatic standby mode
NOTE
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or
- the last press is
or short presses on
stored in the memory.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
•
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
the foot brake is used
04
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed
the gear selector is moved to neutral position (automatic gearbox)
• the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held
depressed for more than approx. 1 minute
then cruise control is disengaged. The
engine must be switched off in order to reset
cruise control.
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
or by switching off
steering wheel button
the engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
04
152
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Speed limiter
General information on the speed
limiter
Activate and adjust the maximum speed
(each press gives +/-5 km/h).
A speed limiter can be regarded as a reverse
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set
speed by the speed limiter.
Stored maximum speed (in brackets =
Standby mode)
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is
active the display will show its
symbol in combination with
the set maximum speed.
Operation
Selection and storage of the
highest possible speed in the
memory can be made both during a journey
and while stationary.
While driving
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Speed limiter - On/Off
Standby mode ceases and stored speed
resumes - each extra press gives +1 km/h.
Standby mode
1. When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press the steering
wheel button
to switch on the speed
limiter.
> The symbol for the speed limiter is illuminated on the instrument panel display.
2. Press one of the steering wheel buttons
or
until the instrument panel display
shows the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
display (5) shows the maximum speed
selected and the maximum speed
stored in the memory.
When stationary
1. Press the steering wheel button
switch on the speed limiter.
to
2. Scroll with the
button until the instrument panel display shows the desired
maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
display (5) shows the maximum speed
selected and the maximum speed
stored in the memory.
04
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and
set it in standby mode:
Press
.
> The display shows the stored maximum
speed in brackets (5) and the driver can
temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed.
The speed limiter is re-activated by one
at which the display's
press on
brackets disappear and the car's maximum speed is again limited.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly accelerating the car out of a situation:
``
153
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Speed limiter
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The display shows the stored maximum
speed in brackets (5) and the driver can
temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed.
The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the release of the accelerator pedal and the car's speed is
slowed down to below the selected/
stored maximum speed - the display's
brackets disappear and the car's maximum speed is again limited.
04
Alarm for speed exceeded
On steep roads the engine braking effect may
be inadequate and the selected maximum
speed exceeded. The driver is alerted about
this with an acoustic signal.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed
to below the selected maximum speed.
Deactivate
To deactivate the speed limiter:
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The display's symbol for the speed limiter and the set speed (5) are cleared.
The selected and stored speed are thus
deleted from the memory and cannot be
button.
resumed with the
154
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limitation.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
General information on ACC
Function
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead. It provides a
more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main
roads in smooth traffic flows.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The driver sets the desired speed and time
interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is automatically adapted to that.
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
The Function section and onwards informs
about limitations of which the driver should
be aware before using the adaptive cruise
control.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to the standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned by Distance Alert (see page 165) about
the short distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
04
Functions overview.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing system.
Automatic gearbox
The adaptive cruise control has enhanced
functionality on cars with automatic gearbox,
see page 159.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
04
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low
sound when they are being used by cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the cruise
control brakes. Do not rest your foot under
the brake pedal as it could become trapped.
1
156
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see
any vehicle in front then the car will instead
maintain the cruise control's set speed. This
also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front
exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
The cruise control aims to control the speed in
a smooth way. In situations that require rapid
braking the driver must brake himself/herself.
This applies with large differences in speed, or
if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may come
unexpectedly or not at all, see page 161.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h1 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes
too low, the cruise control is set in standby
mode at which automatic braking ceases - the
driver must then take over himself/herself to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
Cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 159.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
cruise control capacity and the driver does not
brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound (see page 173) to alert the driver that
immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to notice
in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are
being worn.
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. Consequently
there may be no warning or it may be subject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but
brake when it is necessary.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The cruise control may have difficultly in keeping the correct distance from the
vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads,
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
down.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
Operation
The cruise control is then activated with
or
, after which the current speed is stored in
the memory - the display text (---) changes to
show the selected speed, e.g. 100 without
brackets.
When the symbol
changes
the radar sensor has
to
detected a vehicle.
Only when the symbol
(with car) is illuminated, is the
distance to the vehicle in front
regulated by the cruise control.
Steering wheel keypad3.
Steering wheel keypad2 and display.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and stored speed
resumes - each extra press gives +1 km/h.
Standby mode
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
04
Changing the speed
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
In active mode the speed is adjusted 5 km/h
with each press on
or
. In active mode
the button
has the same function as
but
results in a lower increase in speed. The last
press is stored in the memory.
Activating and setting the speed
Activate and adjust the speed (each press
gives +/-5 km/h).
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby
mode)
Time interval - On, during adjustment.
Switch on cruise control with one press on the
steering wheel button
- the symbol
is
illuminated in the display. The brackets (6) at
(---) mean that cruise control is set in standby
mode.
Time interval - On, after adjustment.
2
3
Cars with Speed limiter.
Cars without Speed limiter. A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held
depressed for more than approx. 1 minute
then cruise control is disengaged. The
engine must be switched off in order to reset
cruise control.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. Then the display shows
Cruise control Unavailable, see
page 163.
04
Set time interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time distance. One line corresponds to approximately
1 second, 5 lines approximately 2.5 seconds.
Note that a short time interval gives the driver
a short time to react and act if something unexpected happens in the traffic.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds afterwards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the display. The same symbol is also shown when
Distance Alert is activated, see page 165.
NOTE
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
The time interval is increased or decreased
with the steering wheel keypad's thumbwheel
or the buttons
/
(cars without Speed limiter).
If cruise control does not seem to react to
activation the reason may be that the time
interval to the closest vehicle prevents an
increase in speed.
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
The higher the speed, the longer the calculated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
4
158
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in
front smoothly and comfortably.
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keypad without Speed limiter
The time interval is increased using the steering
and decreased using
.
wheel button
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Press the steering wheel button
to temporarily disengage the cruise control and set it in
standby mode - set speed is shown in brackets
in the display, e.g. (100).
Keypad without Speed limiter
Press the steering wheel button
to temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in
standby mode.
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
• the foot brake is used
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute4
• the gear selector is moved to neutral position (automatic gearbox)
• the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
to the last stored speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, such as Stability and traction
control (DSTC). If any of these systems stop
working then cruise control is automatically
deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver
must then intervene and adapt the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
•
•
•
engine speed is too low/high
Extended speed range
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button
. The set speed is
cleared and cannot be resumed with the
button.
• With the automatic gearbox the cruise control can follow another vehicle within the
range of 0-200 km/h - right down to stationary and up to 200 km/h.
Keypad without Speed limiter
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button
in standby mode or
with one long press in active mode. The set
speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with
the
button.
04
NOTE
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
speed falls below 30 km/h5
wheels lose traction
ACC and automatic gearbox*
brake temperature is high
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control has more functions than in cars
with manual gearbox.
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the
cruise control is capable of following another
vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed
cannot be selected.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
car in front starts moving again then the cruise
control is set in standby mode. The driver must
then re-activate the cruise control in one of the
following ways:
• Press the steering wheel button
.
or
The following functions are available:
5
Does not apply to cars with automatic gearbox - they manage right down to stationary.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
• Press the accelerator pedal and accelerate
up to at least about 4 km/h (normal walking
pace).
The cruise control will then resume following
the vehicle in front.
NOTE
04
The cruise control can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 2 minutes - then the
parking brake is applied and the cruise control is disengaged.
•
The driver has to release the parking
brake before the cruise control can be
reactivated.
Change of target
cruise control will slow down for the stationary
vehicle.
WARNING
Cruise control releases the foot brake and is
set in standby mode when:
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and
the target is changed from a moving vehicle
to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
select the stored speed.
• the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
•
• the driver sets the cruise control in standby
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Cruise control is disengaged and set in
standby mode:
• when the speed is below 15 km/h and
cruise control is not sure whether the target
object is a stationary vehicle or some other
object, e.g. a speed bump.
• when the speed is below 15 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
160
the foot brake is released and the driver must
brake himself/herself.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
Automatic braking ceases when
stationary
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the
In certain situations the cruise control interrupts braking when stationary. This means that
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
pedal
• the parking brake is applied
• the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
mode.
Automatic activation parking brake
In some situations the cruise control applies
the parking brake in order to keep a stationary
car remaining stationary.
This takes place if:
• the driver opens the door or takes off his/
her seatbelt
• DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
• cruise control has held the car stationary
for more than 2 minutes
• the engine is switched off
• the brakes have overheated.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
The radar sensor and its limitations
Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the
radar sensor is also used by the Collision
Warning with Auto Brake function (see
page 172) and the Distance Alert function (see
page 165). The function of the radar sensor is
to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same
direction, in the same lane.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Function section and onwards informs
about limitations of which the driver should
be aware before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
NOTE
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be installed in front of
the grille.
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor
clean.
• if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
04
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
• if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car and
vehicles in front.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
04
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
The ACC cannot see small vehicles (Dark triangle:
ACC field of vision).
162
In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise
Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning
with Auto Brake functions are not operating
either.
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
Cause
Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
04
Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Time interval activated, during adjustment.
Time interval activated, after adjustment.
Turn on DSTC to enable
Cruise
Cruise control cannot be activated until the stability and traction control function (DSTC) has been set
in Normal mode.
Cruise control Cancelled
The cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.
Cruise control Unavailable
Cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See manual
Cruise control temporarily disengaged.
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.
04
Cruise control Service
required
Cruise control not working.
Press Brake To hold +
acoustic alarm
(Only cars with automatic gearbox)
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to
take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
• The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
–
164
Below 30 km/h Only following
(Only cars with automatic gearbox)
Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front
within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
General
Distance Alert is a function that informs the
driver about the time interval to vehicles in
front.
Distance alert is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance Alert is deactivated during the time
that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
WARNING
Distance Alert only reacts if the distance to
the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset
value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is
not affected.
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR under
SETUP Car settings Distance Alert
On/Off. For a description of the menu system
- see page 127.)
Set time interval
04
Operation
Controls and display.
Time interval - Increase/decrease
Time interval - On, during adjustment
Yellow warning light.
A yellow warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to
the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time
interval.
Time interval - On, after adjustment
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Time interval is adjusted with button (4) - Press
up to increase, down decreases.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time distance. One line corresponds to approximately
1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 2.5 seconds.
04
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds afterwards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the display. The same symbol is also shown when
adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed, the longer the calculated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
adaptive cruise control function, see
page 157.
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-
Message
Specification
Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
166
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
ing system. For more information on the radar
sensor and its limitations, see page 161.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Radar blocked.
Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.
See manual
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.
Collision warn. Service
required
Distance Alert and Collision Warning with Auto Brake are fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety™
General
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the
traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
04
The function is active at speeds of up to
30 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of imminent risk of
collision with vehicles in front, should the driver
not react in time by braking and/or steering
away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
Function
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles
or to humans and animals.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a
higher speed difference, it is only possible
to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
full brake function, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the car
is extremely close to being in a collision.
168
If the car is also equipped with a Collision
Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
systems complement each other. For more
information on Collision Warning function with
Auto Brake, see page 172.
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window.
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of
the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of
collision, City Safety™ will automatically brake
the car, which may be experienced as sudden
braking.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances, just
behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this
is well outside normal driving style and may be
experienced as being uncomfortable.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety™
If the difference in speed between the vehicles
is 15-30 km/h, City Safety™ may not prevent
the collision on its own. To obtain full brake
force, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
This could make it possible to prevent a collision even at speed differences above
15 km/h.
Using MY CAR on the centre console display
screen with its menu system, search and locate
SETUP Car settings Driver support
system City Safety. Select the option Off.
(For information on the menu system MY
CAR, see page 127.)
When the function is activated and brakes, the
instrument panel display shows a message to
the effect that the function is/has been active.
However, the function will be enabled the next
time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
NOTE
The brake lights come on when City
Safety™ brakes the car.
Operation
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always enabled after the engine has been started via
key position I and II (see page 74 on key
positions).
On and Off
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows:
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety™ again:
• Follow the same procedure as for disabling, but select the On option.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the
bonnet limit the function.
The infrared light from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.
When the car is reversing City Safety™ cannot
be activated.
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality in e.g. heavy snowfall or
rain, dense fog, dust storms or snow flurries.
Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may
disrupt the function.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which
is why City Safety™ does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering, braking or
accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
Limitations
04
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
City Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
``
169
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety™
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when City Safety™ has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the laser
sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be
diligent about keeping the windscreen and
area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
laser sensor is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor
field of vision is
blocked.
Remove the blocking object.
04
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front of
the laser sensor free from ice, snow and
dirt (see the illustration for sensor location, page 168).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a height
of 5 cm.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the windscreen in front of either of the
laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a
surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger),
then a workshop must be contacted for
repair or replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location, page
168) - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced
performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety™
performance the following also applies:
•
The same type or a Volvo-approved
windscreen must be fitted during
replacement
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
Laser sensor
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown on the instrument panel display, it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety™ is not
operational.
170
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety™
WARNING
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at
a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass,
microscope, lens or similar optical instruments - this would involve a risk of eye injury
(the illustration on page 168 shows sensor
location).
For more information on the laser sensor, see
page 10.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the READ button on the direction indicator stalk.
Symbols and messages in the display
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ system, one or more symbols
may illuminate on the instrument panel and a
message may appear on its display.
04
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 169.
City Safety Service
required
City Safety™ is not operational.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
171
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
General
Collision Warning with Auto Brake (Collision
Warning with Full Auto Brake and Pedestrian
Detection) is designed to assist the driver when
there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian or
vehicle in front that is stationary or moving in
the same direction.
The collision warning system has the following
three functions.
04
• Collision Warning – Warns the driver of a
potentially imminent collision.
• Brake Support – Assists the driver to
driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there will be a collision sooner or later.
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ complement each other. For more
information on City Safety™, see page 168.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of collision warning system
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
brake effectively in a critical situation.
WARNING
• Auto Brake - Brakes the car automatically
in the event of an imminent risk of collision
with a pedestrian or vehicle in front, if the
driver does not himself/herself react in time
by braking and/or steering away. The Auto
Brake function can prevent a collision or
reduce collision speed.
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never try out the Auto brake system by driving towards people - this may
cause serious injuries or risk death.
The collision warning system is activated in situations where the driver should have started
braking a lot earlier, which is why the function
cannot help the driver in every situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed
to be activated as late as possible in order to
avoid unnecessary intervention.
The collision warning system must not be used
as an excuse for the driver to change his/her
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
driving in another direction to the car or to
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. The Function section and
the section after advise about limitations of
which the driver should be aware before
using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians do not work in darkness and
tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even when
the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver
is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained - even
when the collision warning system with
auto-brake is used.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
Function
Brake support
Operation
If the risk of collision still increases after the
collision warning then the brake support is activated. The brake support prepares the brake
system for rapid braking and the brakes are
applied gently, which may be noticed as a
slight jerk.
Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre
console display screen and menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 127.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
Functions overview.
Visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Collision warning
Together with a camera sensor, the radar sensor detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as
well as vehicles driving in the same direction in
front of the car.
In the event of there being a risk of collision with
a pedestrian or such a vehicle your attention is
drawn with a red flashing warning signal and a
warning sound.
Auto Brake
If the driver has not yet started an evasive
manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a
collision is imminent then the Auto Brake function comes into effect, without the driver needing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake
force if it is sufficient to avoid collision.
NOTE
04
On and Off
To select whether the collision warning system
should be switched on or off: Search with the
menu system MY CAR via the centre console
display screen and locate SETUP Car
settings Driver support system
Collision warn. Collis'n warn ON. For
information on the menu system,see
page 127.
An activated function is tested at each engine
start by briefly illuminating the warning lamp's
separate points of light.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
Activating/deactivating warning signals
The warning lamp is activated automatically
when the engine is started if the system is
switched on.
The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately using the options for On or
Off in the menu system MY CAR under SETUP
Car settings Driver support system
Collision warn. Audio.
04
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed. Select one of the options from
Long, Normal or Short in the menu system
MY CAR under SETUP Car settings
Driver support system Collision warn..
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then change to warning distance
Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
174
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will be
used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but
the function cannot shorten driver reaction
time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance
Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see
page 165.
Limitations
The collision warning system is active from and
including approx. 4 km/h.
The visual warning signal may be difficult to
notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity to
avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS
and DSTC systems will provide best possible
braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long then in certain situations warnings
could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the
event of large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display screen. Search with the
menu system MY CAR under SETUP Car
settings Driver support system
Collision warn., see page 127.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or if
steering wheel and pedal movements
are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and the system therefore provides effective warnings and brake interventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.
For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 161.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This would lead to the system warning at a later stage, which reduces the total
number of warnings.
why the system does not intervene in situations
where the car is approaching a vehicle in front
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which
is why Collision Warning with Auto Brake does
not intervene in situations where the driver is
steering, braking or accelerating in a clear
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car's camera sensor is used by the three
functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,
Driver Alert Control, see page 179 and Lane
Departure Warning, see page 182.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not attach or fit anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor, as this
could reduce or prevent the function of one
or more camera-dependent systems.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
example. Under such conditions the functions
of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
04
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriageway
and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
When the car is reversing Collision Warning
with Auto Brake cannot be activated.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
Pedestrians
• In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/
she must appear full-length and have a
height of at least 80 cm.
• The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
• The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like
the human eye.
• The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
04
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information as
possible about the contours of the body - this
implies the opportunity to identify the head,
arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body
combined with a normal human pattern of
movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is an
assistance tool.
It cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially
obscured pedestrians, shorter people or
children (below 80 cm) or people in clothing
that hides the contours of the body.
•
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven properly and with a
safety distance adapted to the speed.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked then this means that the
camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front
of the car.
In turn this means that the Collision Warning
with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and
Driver Alert Control functions are not operating
with full functionality.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently
well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy
rain or snowfall.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera has been
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
cleaned but the
message remains.
the camera to measure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
04
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Collis'n warning OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Auto braking was activated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the READ button.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Radar blocked. See manual
04
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.
Collision warn. Service
required
178
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System – DAC*
General information on Driver Alert
System
General information on Driver Alert
Control - DAC
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For
this reason it is always important to stop and
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning.
The Driver Alert System consists of two different functions, which can either be switched on
at the same time or individually:
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
page 182.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is instead only intended to be
of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
04
NOTE
The function is intended to attract the driver's
attention when he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or
starts to fall asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of
the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular
intervals and ensure that you are fully
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
• if the driver tests the LDW function.
• in strong side winds.
• on rutted road surfaces.
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see page 175.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System – DAC*
Operation
Thumbwheel. Turn until the display shows
Driver
Alert. On the second line, the options Off,
Standby <65 km/h, Unavailable or Level
mark are shown.
Some settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 127.
The current status can be checked on the trip
computer display with the left-hand stalk
switch.
READ confirms or clears a warning in the
memory.
Activating Driver Alert Control
Using the centre console display screen with
its menu system MY CAR, search and locate
Car settings Driver Alert. Select the On
option. For information on how the menu system is used - see page 127.
04
The function is activated when speed
exceeds 65 km/h and remains active
as long as the speed is over
60 km/h.
The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars,
where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving style. A high number of bars
indicates stable driving.
If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as
the text message Driver Alert Time for a
break. The warning is repeated after a time if
driving ability does not improve.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as
a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
180
Message
Specification
Driver Alert OFF
Function not switched on.
Driver Alert Standby
<65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System – DAC*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Driver Alert
The function analyses the driver's driving style.
The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent
driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
04
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
General information on Lane Departure
Warning - LDW
Operation and function
If the camera can no longer detect the carriageway's side markings the display shows
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable.
If speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the
function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby
<65 km/h.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side
marking of the carriageway without due cause
then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
04
No warning is given in the following situations:
The function is intended to reduce the risk for
single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in
certain situations, the vehicle leaves the carriageway and is in danger of driving either into
a ditch or into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side
markings painted on the carriageway. The
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the
vehicle crosses a side marking.
1
182
The function is switched on or off by means of
a switch on the centre console. An indicator
lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on.
• Direction indicators activated
• The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal1
• In the event of the accelerator pedal being
depressed rapidly1
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Standby <65 km/h when the function is
in standby mode due to speed being below 65
km/h.
• In the event of rapid steering wheel move-
The LDW function is activated automatically
from standby mode after the camera has scanned in the carriageway's side markings and
speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer
display then shows Lane Depart Warn
Available.
The camera sensor also has certain limitations.
For more information, see page 175.
A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 184.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ments1
• In the event of a sudden turn so that the car
rolls.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Lane departure warning
On/Off
The function is switched on/off.
04
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Standby
<65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Lane Depart Warn Available
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
display screen via the menu system in MY
CAR. From there, search and locate SETUP
Car settings Driver support system
Lane departure warning. For information
on how the menu system is used - see
page 127.
Increased sensitivity – This option increases
sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
Select from the options:
On at start up - This option sets the function
in standby mode each time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as when the
engine was switched off is obtained.
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
General
Function
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the
distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
• Rear only
• Both front and rear.
WARNING
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals near
the car.
04
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
The system is automatically activated when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
The centre console's display screen shows an
overview of the relationship between the car
and detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter
the distance between the car and a detected
obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo
genuine trailer wiring is used.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P mode
is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
Front parking assistance
IMPORTANT
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that
they must not obscure the sensors – the
auxiliary lamps could then be detected as
obstacles.
04
Fault indicator
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The system must be deactivated when reversing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar - otherwise they would trigger the
sensors.
186
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
Front parking assistance is active up to
15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated
in order to indicate that the system is activated.
When the speed is below 10 km/h the system
is reactivated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the information display shows Park assist syst Service
required then parking assistance is disengaged.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external audio
sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
Cleaning the sensors
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
04
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist camera*
General
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car's approximate
exterior dimensions are also illustrated by two
dashed lines, the park assist lines can be deactivated in the settings menu.
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can
be changed in the settings menu, see
page 127). The camera can also be activated
by a short press on CAM.
The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.
WARNING
04
•
The parking camera serves as an aid. It
does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
•
The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
CAM button location.
The camera shows what is behind the car and
if something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car
and part of the bumper and any towbar.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order to
illustrate the distance to detected obstacles,
see page 190.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly
- this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the camera image is displayed on the screen.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
188
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist camera*
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in a slightly reduced image quality.
which shows the driver the path the car will
take, even when turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car, the
lines on the display show the route the
car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's
electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
NOTE
Keep camera lenses clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure the best possible function.
This is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
IMPORTANT
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
04
The system's lines.
Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards
from the car
Boundary line, free reversing zone
Bear in mind that the screen only shows the
area behind the car - pay attention to the
sides and front of the car when manoeuvring
during reversing.
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.
Boundary lines
"Wheel tracks"
The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that is
within about 30 cm from the bumper.
The dashed line (2) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also during
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (3) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist camera*
Zoom
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. The towbar can be zoomed in
for precision manoeuvring by pressing CAM.
Pressing again gives normal view.
Cars equipped with parking assistance
sensors*
• YELLOW: More than 1.5 m
• ORANGE: 0.3-1.5 m
• RED: Less than 0.3 m
Settings
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown. Make the settings as desired.
Miscellaneous
• Hitching a trailer - press CAM to zoom in
on the towball.
04
• Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing
CAM. If there are more cameras installed
then turn TUNE.
• If the car has several cameras* installed
then change between the cameras by turning TUNE, press CAM repeatedly or use
the keypad in the centre console.
Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (see page 185) the distance indication will be more precise and the coloured
areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are registering an obstacle.
• Press OK/MENU when a camera is active
to access the settings view.
• The camera can be switched off with a long
The colour of the areas changes with decreasing distance to the obstacle - from yellow to
orange to red.
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
press on CAM. A short press on CAM
reactivates the camera. The default setting
is that the camera is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
Limitations
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
Even if it only looks like a relatively small part
of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are
very close to the car.
To bear in mind
• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
• Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
General information on BLIS
Blind spots
WARNING
G021426
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
BLIS camera
The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2)
illuminates with a constant glow.
Indicator lamp
BLIS is an information system based on camera technology that under certain conditions
can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in
the same direction as the host vehicle in the socalled "blind spot".
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m
Activating/deactivating
NOTE
BLIS symbol
04
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the system's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
on the information display. In such cases,
check and clean the lenses.
If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily, see the section Activate/deactivate.
Button for activating/deactivating.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated after
starting the engine with one press on the
BLIS button.
04
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR under
SETUP Car settings BLIS. (For a
description of the menu system, see
page 127.)
When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the button goes out and a message is shown in the
instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ button to delete the text message. (For a description of messages, see page 124).
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if:
• you overtake another vehicle at a speed of
up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle
• you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up
to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
those of the human eye, i.e. they do not
"see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, against
strong light or in thick fog.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
Cleaning
BLIS does not work when the car is reversing.
In order to work most effectively the BLIS camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can prevent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
IMPORTANT
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the headlamps of surrounding vehicles. If the headlamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched
on then the system does not detect the vehi-
192
cles. This means for example that the system
does not react to a trailer without headlamps
which is towed behind a car or truck.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
Messages on the display
Message
Specification
Blind-spot info
system ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
Blind spot syst.
Service required
Blind spot syst. disengaged - contact a
workshop.
Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is
blocked by dirt,
snow or ice - clean
the lenses.
Limitations
Message
Specification
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
Reduced function in
the data transmission between the
BLIS system's camera and the car's
electrical system.
The camera resets
itself when the data
transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electrical system returns to
normal.
Blind-spot info
system OFF
The BLIS system is
deactivated.
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on isolated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
04
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text Blind spot syst.
Service required.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
04
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
194
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
04
``
195
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage compartment in door panel
Tunnel console
Glovebox
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment
Jacket holder
04
Storage compartment, cup holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
196
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are
specified then there is a cigarette lighter in
the 12 V socket for the front seat, see
page 197, and a detachable ashtray in the
cup holder.)
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
be locked with the key blade, see page 46.
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor
mats.
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment
clips to prevent it from being trapped
around and under the pedals.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Vanity mirror
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 258.
G021438
04
Vanity mirror with lighting.
12 V socket
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. For the socket to supply current,
the remote control key must be in at least key
position I, see page 74.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets are used
simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is
applicable.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
General information on infotainment.....................................................
Quick start.............................................................................................
General infotainment functions.............................................................
Radio.....................................................................................................
Media player.........................................................................................
External audio source via AUX/USB* input...........................................
200
202
206
209
216
220
Media BluetoothŸ* ................................................................................ 223
TV*......................................................................................................... 226
Remote control* ................................................................................... 230
BluetoothŸ handsfree*.......................................................................... 232
Voice recognition* mobile phone.......................................................... 240
Menu navigation, Infotainment.............................................................. 244
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
05 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General
The infotainment system in your car has one of
the following four levels:
Performance
• 5" TFT colour display
• Steering wheel keypad* without thumbwheel
•
•
•
•
•
05
AM/FM radio
CD
AUX input
6 speakers
4x20W amplifier
High Performance
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5" TFT colour display
Steering wheel keypad* with thumbwheel
AM/FM radio
CD
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUX and USB input (for e.g. iPodŸ)
BluetoothŸ handsfree/streaming media
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Audyssey MultEQ1
8 speakers
4x40W amplifier
7" TFT colour display
Steering wheel keypad* with thumbwheel
AM/FM radio
CD/DVD
AUX and USB input (for e.g. iPodŸ)
BluetoothŸ
handsfree/streaming media
AUX and USB input (for e.g. iPodŸ)
BluetoothŸ handsfree/streaming media
8 speakers
4x40W amplifier
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
in the development and tuning of the sound to
ensure a world-class sound experience.
12 speakers
5x130W amplifier
Dolby, Pro Logic
• 7" TFT colour display
• Steering wheel keypad* with thumbwheel
200
CD/DVD
Premium Sound Multimedia
High Performance Multimedia
1
AM/FM radio
Other
If the Infotainment System is active when the
engine is switched off then it is automatically
activated the next time the key is inserted into
key position I or higher, and it continues with
the same source (e.g. radio) as before the
engine was switched off (the driver's door must
be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).
The infotainment system can be used for 15
minutes at a time without the remote control
05 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
key being in the ignition switch by pressing the
On/Off button.
When the car is being started the infotainment
system is switched off temporarily and continues when the engine has started.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the infotainment system is
used when the engine is switched off. This
is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessarily.
05
201
05 Infotainment system
Quick start
Overview, Infotainment
Operating the system
AUX and USB1 inputs for external audio
sources (e.g. iPodŸ)
05
Steering wheel keypad*
Information display. The display is available in two sizes, 5" (applies to Performance
and High Performance) and 7" (applies to
High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia). The manual
shows the 7" display.
Centre console control panel
Short press starts the system and long
press switches off. Briefly press to mute
the sound (MUTE) or restore the sound if it
had been switched off.
Select a source by pressing one of the buttons (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.). By repeatedly pressing you can scroll down among
the options on the display (e.g. FM1),
release and wait a second and the selection is accepted automatically. Alternatively, you can turn TUNE and confirm with
OK/MENU.
Using TUNE you can fast-scroll among
disc tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations,
phone contacts* or navigate through
options on the display (e.g. FM1, Disc).
1
202
USB only applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Source buttons
Control panel with buttons for source selection.
RADIO - Select, for example, AM, FM1,
FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*
MEDIA - Select, for example, Disc, USB*,
iPod, AUX, Bluetooth*, TV*.
TEL - BluetoothŸ handsfree*
05 Infotainment system
Quick start
Basic functions, Infotainment
OK/MENU - accepts selections in menus.
Lead to submenus in selected source (e.g.
RADIO or MEDIA).
The different views for the sources have different appearances depending on the source, incar equipment, settings, etc.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, interrupts the current function, rejects calls and
deletes input characters. One long press
leads to the highest menu level (parent
view), see page 204.
INFO - press the button to see more information about a function, song, etc. For
more information, see page 206
Centre console with controls for basic functions.
SOUND - leads to the audio settings menu
(bass, treble, etc.). For more information,
see page 206.
VOL - turn it to raise and lower the volume
level.
- short press starts the system and
long press switches off. Briefly press to
mute the sound (MUTE) or restore the
sound if it had been switched off.
Preset buttons, input of numbers and letters.
Using TUNE you can fast-scroll among
disc tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations,
phone contacts* or navigate through
options on the display.
FAV - shortcut to a favourite setting. The
button can be programmed for a commonly used function in AM, FM, etc. For
more information, see page 206.
Example of normal view (Radio).
05
Views in the display
General information about views in the
display
The system contains four different types of
views. A top-level menu, so-called Parent view,
common to all sources, see page 204. For
each source there are three different basic
types of views:
• Normal view - normal mode for the source
• Quick view - fast mode when TUNE is
turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio
station, etc.
Example of quick view (Radio).
• Menu view - for menu navigation
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
05 Infotainment system
Quick start
A long press on EXIT on the steering wheel
keypad* accesses the highest menu level,
called parent view (see illustration above). The
function is a quick way to choose or change the
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.) directly from
the steering wheel keypad* without taking your
hands off the steering wheel. The function is
also available from the control panel buttons in
the centre console.
• Select source (1) by turning the thumbExample of menu view (BluetoothŸ handsfree).
wheel on the steering wheel keypad*, press
the thumbwheel to confirm the selection.
• Turn the thumbwheel to one of the options
(2) on the display (e.g. FM1), press the
thumbwheel to confirm the selection.
Parent view
05
MY CAR - My Car
CAM - Park Assist Camera*
Steering wheel keypad*
The keypad is available in three different versions depending on the options and the equipment level of the car.
Steering wheel keypad without
thumbwheel
You will then reach the desired source (e.g.
RADIO/FM1).
Use a long press on EXIT to go back.
NAV - Navigation*
RADIO – Radio
Example of parent view (Radio).
Sources (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA, etc.), see
table.
Source menu, e.g. (FM1, DISC, etc.).
204
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
MEDIA – Media
TEL – BluetoothŸ handsfree*
Short presses scroll between disc tracks
or scan for the next available radio station2. Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind disc tracks.
Volume
05 Infotainment system
Quick start
Steering wheel keypad with thumbwheel
to MENU), or confirm a selection (OK) in the
menu system, and accept phone calls.
press leads to the highest menu level
(parent view), see page 204.
MUTE - switches off the sound
Thumbwheel - turn up/down to scroll up
and down in the menu system. Press the
thumbwheel to access a menu (equivalent
to MENU), or confirm a selection (OK) in the
menu system, and accept phone calls.
Steering wheel keypad with
thumbwheel, for voice recognition 3
Voice recognition (for BluetoothŸ-connected mobile phone and navigation system*)
Short presses scroll between disc tracks
or preset radio stations2. Long presses
are used to fast forward and rewind disc
tracks.
05
Volume
EXIT – leads up in the menu system. Interrupt current function, end/refuse phone
calls, clear entered characters. One long
press leads to the highest menu level
(parent view), see page 204.
Thumbwheel - turn up/down to scroll up
and down in the menu system. Press the
thumbwheel to access a menu (equivalent
2
3
Short presses scroll between disc tracks
or preset radio stations2. Long presses
are used to fast forward and rewind disc
tracks.
Volume
EXIT – leads up in the menu system. Interrupt current function, end/refuse phone
calls, clear entered characters. One long
Does not apply to DAB.
Only cars with navigation.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
05 Infotainment system
General infotainment functions
FAV - store a preset
• Bluetooth*
• AUX
• TV*
INFO - shows additional information
You can also select and store a favourite for
TEL*, MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites
can also be selected and stored under MY
CAR. For more information on the menu system MY CAR, see page 127.
To store a function in the FAV button:
1. Select an infotainment source (e.g.
RADIO, MEDIA etc.).
05
The FAV button can be used to store functions
that are used frequently so that the function
can be started simply by pressing FAV. You
can select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for each
function as follows:
In RADIO mode:
• AM
• FM1/FM2
• DAB1*/DAB2*
2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc,
etc.).
3. Press and hold the FAV button until the
"favourites menu" is shown.
4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the list
and press OK/MENU to save.
> When the source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA
etc.) is active you have access to the
stored function by means of a short
press on FAV.
In MEDIA mode:
• DISC
• USB*
• iPod*
206
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In some cases there is more information available (on a radio station, song, artist, etc.) than
can be shown in the display. To see more information, press the INFO button.
General audio settings
Press SOUND to access the audio settings
menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.
Treble).
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the setting with OK/MENU.
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
access other options:
05 Infotainment system
General infotainment functions
• Surround1 - Can be set to the On/Off position. When On is selected, the system
selects the setting for optimal sound reprothen
duction. Normally DPLII and
appear in the display. If the recording is
made with Dolby Digital technology then
playback will take place with this setting,
then appears in the display. When
Off is selected, 3-channel stereo is available.
• Bass - Bass level.
• Treble - Treble level.
• Fader – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
• Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
• Centre level1 - Volume for the centre
speaker.
• Surround level1, 2 – Level for surround.
Advanced audio settings
Equalizer3
The volume level can be adjusted separately
for different wavelengths.
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer.
2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Adjust the volume level by turning TUNE
and confirm with OK/MENU. Continue in
the same way with other wavelengths.
4. When you are finished with the settings,
turn TUNE OK and confirm by pressing
OK/MENU or EXIT.
For general information on menu navigation
and menu structures, see page 244.
Sound stage1
The sound experience can be optimised for the
driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
If there are passengers in both the front and
rear seats then the option recommended is;
both front seats. The options can be selected
under Audio settings Sound stage.
1
2
3
For general information on menu navigation
and menu structures, see page 244.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume in relation to the speed
of the car. The compensation level can be set
to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
under Audio settings Volume
compensation.
For general information on menu navigation
and menu structures, see page 244.
External audio source audio volume
05
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player
or iPodŸ) is connected to the AUX input then
the audio source that is connected can have a
different volume than the audio system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjusting the volume of the input:
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to
AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/
MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to set the volume for the AUX
input.
Only Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only when Surround is activated.
Not Performance.
``
207
05 Infotainment system
General infotainment functions
NOTE
If the external audio source's volume is too
high or too low, the quality of the sound may
deteriorate. The audio quality may also be
impaired if the player is charged while the
infotainment system is in AUX mode. In
which case, avoid charging the player via
the 12 V socket.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital
signal processing.
05
This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be
able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste.
208
05 Infotainment system
Radio
Radio functions, general
Station list1
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 204. For a description of
the remote control, see page 230.
Menus
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength
(AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).
Station presets (0-9)
Select the desired frequency/station or
navigate in the radio menu by turning
TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the radio
menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Hold in the button for next/previous available station. Short press for preset.
1
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 244.
Radio AM/FM
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals it is currently receiving. This enables you to find a station when you drive into an area where you do
not know the radio stations and their frequencies.
To go to the list and select a station:
1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or
FM2).
2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
This displays the list of all stations in the
area. The currently tuned station is indicated with enlarged text in the list.
05
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station from the list.
Tuning
Automatic tuning
1. Repeatedly press on the RADIO button
until the desired wavelength (AM, FM1
etc.) is shown, release and wait a second
or press OK/MENU.
2. Hold in
/
in the centre console (or
in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio
searches for the next/previous available
station.
Only applies to FM1/FM2.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
209
05 Infotainment system
Radio
NOTE
05
•
The list only shows the frequencies of
stations that are currently being
received, not a complete list of all radio
frequencies on the selected wavelength.
•
If the signal from the currently received
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the station list. If
button
this occurs, press the
(while the station list is shown in the display) in order to change to manual tuning and set a frequency. If the station list
is no longer shown, turn TUNE one step
in either direction to show the list again,
to switch.
and press
The list disappears from the display after a few
seconds.
If the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction and press the
button in the centre console to change
to manual tuning (or to return from manual tuning to the function for "Station list").
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio
shows the station list of the strongest stations
in the area when you turn the TUNE (see pre-
210
vious section "Station list" above). When the
station list is shown, press the
button in
the centre console to change to manual tuning.
This allows you to select a frequency from the
list of all available radio frequencies in the
selected wavelength. In other words, if turn
TUNE one step in a manual search the frequency is changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz,
etc.
To manually select a station:
1. Repeatedly press on the RADIO button
until the desired wavelength (AM, FM1
etc.) is shown, release and wait a second
or press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.
NOTE
The preset from the factory is that the radio
automatically searches for the stations in
the area where you are driving (see previous
section "Station list" above).
But if you have changed over to manual tuning (by pressing the
button in the centre console when the station list was
shown), then the radio remains set in the
function for manual tuning the next time you
switch on the radio. To change back to the
function for "Station list", turn TUNE one
step (to show the complete list of stations)
and press the button
.
Note that if you press
when the station list is not shown then INFO is activated.
For more information on this function, see
page 206.
Preset
10 presets can be stored per wavelength
(AM, FM1 etc.).
The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.
1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning" above).
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few
seconds, the sound disappears during this
05 Infotainment system
Radio
time and returns when the station is stored.
The preset button can now be used.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2
in the display. The function is activated/deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu
Show presets or AM menu Show
presets.
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches the current wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds before scanning is resumed. When a station is playing back it can be saved as a preset
in the usual way, see the section "Preset"
above.
To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to
FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
2
• Automatically switches to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
• Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news.
• Receives text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting
transmission is played at a preset volume, see
page 213. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and programme types (PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
For further programme interruption settings
(EON Distant and EON Local), see
page 211. Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio source, press OK/MENU to clear
the message.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The TP symbol indicates that the
function is activated. If the preset station can
send traffic information then this is shown by
TP glowing brightly in the display, otherwise
TP will be grey.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu TP.
05
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many
regional radio stations. It allows the distance
between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions
should interrupt the current audio source.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by selecting one of the options under FM menu
Advanced settings EON:
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
``
211
05 Infotainment system
Radio
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
• Distant3 – interrupts if the station transmitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
TP from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for traffic information from the selected station or all stations
within the RDS network.
Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced
settings Set TP favourite to change.
News
05
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu News settings News.
News from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for news from the
selected station or all stations in the RDS network.
3
212
Go in FM mode to FM menu News
settings Set news favourite to change.
Factory settings.
Programme types – PTY
PTY search
The PTY function can be used to select one or
more programme types, such as pop music
and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates
that the function is active. This function allows
programme types broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through.
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
programme types under FM menu
Advanced settings PTY settings
Select PTY.
2. Go to FM menu
PTY settings
2. Then the PTY function must be activated
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
An indicator is shown on the display when
PTY is activated.
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed
in FM mode under FM menu Advanced
settings PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected programme types (PTY) are not reset.
Resetting and removing PTY are performed
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under
FM menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Select PTY.
Advanced settings
Seek PTY.
To finish searching, press EXIT.
To continue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types,
or
.
press on
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Show PTY text.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Show radio text.
05 Infotainment system
Radio
The function selects the strongest transmitter
for the set station. In order to find a strong
transmitter the function may, in exceptional
cases, need to search the entire FM wavelength.
interruption, the new level is saved until the
next programme interruption.
learn. Programming can also take place as follows:
Radio system - DAB*
1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
> Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
available channel groups.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio.
Automatic frequency update – AF
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings
Alternative frequency.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low. The symbol REG shows that the function is active.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings REG.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected
for each respective programme type. If the volume level is adjusted during the programme
General
2. Press OK/MENU.
> New programming is started.
Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
NOTE
If can take up to a minute to program a channel
group if both Band III and LBand are selected.
For more information on wavelength, see
page 214.
This system does not support DAB+.
Service and Ensemble
• Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the system).
• Ensemble - A collection of radio channels
on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broadcasting area, programming of existing channel
groups in the area may be necessary.
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically.
Programming is carried out in the menu system
in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble
Navigation in channel group list
(Ensemble)
05
To navigate in and access the channel group
list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is
in the upper part of the display. When you scroll
and come to a new Ensemble the name is
changed to the new one. A thick grey line separates the two channel groups from each other.
• Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allocated. The list can also be filtered using the
selection of programme type (PTY
filtering), see below.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
05 Infotainment system
Radio
Scanning
The function automatically searches the current wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds before scanning is resumed. When a station is playing back it is saved as a preset in the
usual way. For more information on presets,
see "Preset" below.
Go in DAB mode to DAB menu
start scanning.
Scan to
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
05
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the preselected programme type are played.
Programme type (PTY)
Various types of radio programmes can be
selected using the programme type function.
There are a number of different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels
that are broadcasting that type.
to leave this mode. An indicator is shown on
the display when PTY is activated.
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode
when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is implemented.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wavelength. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. Storing of presets is performed in the usual way, for more information
see page 210. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no subchannels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the main channel is
registered. This is because subchannels are
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the
preset, the channel which contained the subchannel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown4
in the display. The function is activated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Show presets.
Programme type is selected in DAB mode
under DAB menu PTY filtering. Use EXIT
4
214
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions available in the DAB
standard.
Radio text
Some radio stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information is shown on the display.
The function is deactivated/activated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Show radio text.
NOTE
You can only have one of the functions "Show radio text" and "Show
presets" activated at a time. If one of them
is activated, when the other is already activated, then the previously activated function is deactivated automatically. Both functions can be deactivated.
Advanced settings
DAB to DAB link
It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another channel group with better reception. There may be
a certain delay when changing channel group.
There may be a period of silence between the
05 Infotainment system
Radio
current channel no longer being available to the
new channel becoming available.
cated by the > symbol appearing to the left of
the channel name in the display.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB linking.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
channel without selecting it.
Wavelength
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels.
DAB can be transmitted on
two5
wavelengths:
• Band III - covers areas outside big cities
• LBand - mainly in large cities
By selecting for example Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both Band III and LBand are
selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Programme type text
Some radio stations broadcast information
about programme type and programme category. This information is shown on the display.
The function is activated/deactivated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings Show PTY text.
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB band.
Resetting the DAB settings
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages.
05
All DAB settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
The reset is carried out in DAB mode under
DAB menu Advanced settings
Reset all DAB settings.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then
the > symbol is shown to the right of the channel name in the display. A subchannel is indi5
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
215
05 Infotainment system
Media player
CD/DVD1 functions
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:
• Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).
• Burned CD discs with audio and/or video
files1.
• Pre-recorded DVD video discs1.
• Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or video
files.
For more information about the supported formats, see page 219.
NOTE
Centre console control panel.
Disc insert and eject slot
05
MEDIA key
Disc eject
Input of numbers and letters.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 204. For a description of
the remote control, see page 230.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate
through menu options by turning TUNE.
Menus
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
for the selected media source by pressing
OK/MENU.
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 244.
Fast forward/reverse and change disc
track or chapter2.
1
2
216
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only applies to DVD discs.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Starting playback of a disc
Repeatedly press on the MEDIA button until
Disc is shown, release and wait a second or
press OK/MENU. If there is a disc in the media
player then the disc starts playing back automatically, otherwise Insert disc is shown in the
display. Then insert a disc, with text side up.
The disc starts to play back automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
the player then the disc's folder structure
needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
of the disc and the quantity of information there
may be a certain delay before playback starts.
Disc eject
A disc remains in the ejected position for
about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted
back into the player for safety reasons.
Pause
When the volume is turned down completely
the media player is paused. When the volume
is increased, it starts again.
Playback and navigation
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm
the selection of the disc track and start play-
05 Infotainment system
Media player
back. Use EXIT to interrupt and exit the playlist.
To change the disc track you can also press
/
on the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
Burned discs audio/video files1
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder
structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use
OK/MENU to confirm either selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Using EXIT you can either
stop and exit the playlist or go up (back) in the
folder structure.
To change audio/video file you can also press
/
on the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files1
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in that
particular folder continues. Change3 of folder
takes place automatically when all the files in
the current folder have been played back. The
system automatically detects and changes
1
3
4
setting when a disc containing only audio files
or only video files is loaded into the media
player and then plays back these files. However, the system does not change setting if a
disc containing a mixture of audio and video
files is loaded into the media player, but instead
the player continues to play back the previous
file type.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display,
although the audio is heard during this time.
The picture is shown again as soon as the
car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.
NOTE
Some audio files that are copy-protected by
record companies or privately copied audio
files cannot be loaded by the player.
DVD video
discs1
For playback of DVD video discs, see
page 218.
Fast forward/reverse
By holding in the buttons
/
you can
fast forward/rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound at one speed, while video files
are fast forwarded/rewound at several speeds.
/
to
Repeatedly press the buttons
increase the fast forward/rewind speed for
video files. Release the button to return to
viewing at normal speed.
Music recognition, GracenoteŸ
If the car is equipped with navigation* then
there is a hard drive in the car that contains a
database for music recognition of CD discs.
The database contains the most popular songs
at the moment. If the media player gets a hit in
the database then the media title and artist
name for the media are displayed, and each
track shows track title, artist and album. If the
current CD disc is not found in the database
then the CD text from the disc is used.
05
Scan4
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each disc track/audio file. To scan:
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Scan
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
Does not apply to DVD video discs.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
217
05 Infotainment system
Media player
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
or audio file are played.
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track
or audio file being played back will continue playing.
Random4
This function plays the tracks in random order.
To listen to the tracks in random order:
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
05
To change the disc track/audio file you can
/
on the centre console or steerpress
ing wheel keypad*.
Repeat folder5
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder over and over again. When the last file
has been played out, playback of the first file
starts again.
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
Playback of DVD video discs1
Playback
When playing back a DVD video disc the film
starts automatically when the Auto play function is activated. For more information, see
page 219.
If the Auto play function is deactivated then a
disc menu appears on the display. The disc
menu gives access to additional functions and
settings, such as selecting subtitles and language, scene selection and start of the film.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display,
although the audio is heard during this time.
The picture is shown again as soon as the
car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
4
5
1
218
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu
Does not apply to DVD video discs.
Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
performed using the number keys in the centre
console as illustrated above.
Changing chapter or title
By turning TUNE you will reach a list of chapters and you can navigate through them (if a
film is playing it is paused). Press OK/MENU
to select a chapter and return to the start position (if a film was playing it is restarted). Use
EXIT to access the title list.
In the title list you can select the title by turning
TUNE and then confirm the selection using
OK/MENU, you will then return to the chapter
list. Press OK/MENU to activate the selection
05 Infotainment system
Media player
and return to the start position. Use EXIT to
interrupt and return to the start position (without having selected anything).
Picture settings6
Advanced settings6
•
•
•
•
Automatic playback
Automatic playback means that if you insert a
DVD video disc in the media player the playback of the disc's main title will start automatically. You do not need to select language,
subtitles, etc., or press Play in the disc menu
to start the film. To activate/deactivate the
function go in disc mode to Disc menu
Advanced settings Auto play.
Angle
If the DVD video disc supports it, you can use
this function to choose from which camera
position you want to see a particular scene. Go
in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced
settings Angle.
DivXŸ Video On Demand
The media player can be registered in order to
play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or
USB. The code for registration is available in
disc mode under Disc menu Advanced
settings DivX® VOD code. For more information visit www.divx.com/vod.
6
NOTE
You can adjust the settings (when the car is
stationary) for:
Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus,
CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD
discs and therefore playback cannot be
guaranteed and malfunction may arise.
brightness
contrast
If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA
tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
shade
colour / paint.
1. Press OK/MENU and select Image
settings, confirm with OK/MENU.
Audio formatA
CD audio, mp3,
wma
2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and
confirm with OK/MENU.
Audio formatB
3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
CD audio, mp3,
wma, aac, m4a
Video formatC
CD video,
DVD video, divx, avi,
asf
To return to the settings list, press the OK/
MENU or EXIT.
The picture settings can be reset to factory
settings with the Reset option.
A
B
C
05
Applies to Performance.
Does not apply to Performance.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
Compatible file formats
The media player can play back a variety of file
types and is compatible with the formats in the
following table.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
219
05 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
AUX, USB1 and external audio source
General
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 204. For a description of
the remote control, see page 230.
An iPodŸ or MP3 player with rechargeable batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on or
the engine is running) if the device is plugged
into the USB connection.
To connect the audio source:
05
Connection points for external audio sources.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPodŸ or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system
via any of the connections in the centre console. An audio source connected to the USB
input can then be handled2 with the car's audio
controls. A device connected via the AUX input
cannot be controlled via the car.
1. Repeatedly press on MEDIA to reach the
desired audio source USB, iPod or AUX,
release and wait a second or press OK/
MENU.
> If USB is selected then Connect USB is
shown in the display.
2. Connect your audio source to one of the
connections in the centre console's storage compartment (see previous illustration).
The text Reading USB is shown in the display
when the system is loading the storage
1
2
3
220
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.
Only applies to USB and iPodŸ.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
media's file structure. Depending on the file
structure and number of files there may be
some delay before loading is finished.
NOTE
The system supports most iPodŸ models
produced in 2005 or later.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the USB connection,
this is shut off if the USB connection is
short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is
taking too much power (this may happen if
the unit connected does not meet the USB
standard). The USB connection is reactivated automatically the next time the ignition
is turned on, unless the fault persists.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 244.
Playback and navigation3
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/
MENU to confirm either selection of subfolder
05 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
or start of playback of the selected audio/video
file. Using EXIT you can either stop and exit the
playlist or go up (back) in the folder structure.
To change audio/video file you can also press
/
on the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
Scan3
NOTE
See page 217.
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of the enclosed USB adapter
cable is recommended. This is to avoid
mechanical wear to the USB input and the
connected USB memory stick.
Random3
See page 218.
Repeat folder6
Audio files have the symbol
, video
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
See page 218.
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in that
particular folder continues. Change5 of folder
takes place automatically when all the files in
the current folder have been played back. The
system automatically detects and changes
setting when a disc containing only audio files
or only video files is loaded into the media
player and then plays back these files. However, the system does not change setting if a
disc containing a mixture of audio and video
files is loaded into the media player, but instead
the player continues to play back the previous
file type.
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer
for the system to load storage media that contains anything other than compatible music
files.
files4
USB hub
Audio sources
USB memory
NOTE
The system supports mobile media compliant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system
and can handle 1000 folders with a maximum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder.
The top level, which can handle up to 1000
subfolders/files, is an exception to this.
You can connect a USB hub to the USB connection and thereby connect multiple USB
devices simultaneously. Selection of USB
device is made in USB mode under USB menu
Select USB device.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
05
iPodŸ
An iPodŸ is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's connection cable.
Fast forward/reverse3
See page 217.
4
5
3
6
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
Only applies to USB and iPodŸ.
Only applies to USB.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
05 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
NOTE
The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPodŸ.
NOTE
When an iPodŸ is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPodŸ player's
own menu structure.
Compatible file formats via the USB
connection
05
Audio and video files in the following table are
supported by the system for playback via the
USB connection.
A
222
Audio format
mp3, wma, aac,
m4a
Video formatA
divx, avi, asf
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Infotainment system
Media BluetoothŸ*
Streaming audio
General
The car's media player is equipped with
BluetoothŸ1 and can wirelessly play streaming
audio files from external devices with
BluetoothŸ, such as mobile phones and PDAs.
Navigation and control of the sound can be
carried out via the centre console buttons or via
the steering wheel keypad*. In some external
devices you can also change tracks from the
device.
To play back the audio you must first set the
car's media player in Bluetooth mode.
Overview
NOTE
The BluetoothŸ media player must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The player should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
Not all mobile phones and external media
players available in the market are fully compatible with the BluetoothŸ function in the
car's media player. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones and external media
players.
NOTE
The car's media player can only play the
audio files via the BluetoothŸ function.
Centre console control panel.
VOL – volume
05
MEDIA key
Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
the function in progress.
Short presses are used to scroll between
audio files. Long presses are used to fast
forward and rewind audio files.
1
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
223
05 Infotainment system
Media BluetoothŸ*
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 204. For a description of
the remote control, see page 230.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 244.
05
Pair and connect external device
The connection of an external device takes
place in different ways depending on whether
or not it has been previously paired. A maximum of 10 external devices can be paired.
Pairing takes place once per external device.
To connect a device for the first time, follow the
instructions below:
1. Repeatedly press on MEDIA until
Bluetooth is shown, release and wait a
second or press OK/MENU.
2. Press OK/MENU.
3. When Add device is shown, press OK/
MENU.
224
4. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via BluetoothŸ, see the manual
for the external device.
5. Press OK/MENU.
> The infotainment system searches for
external devices in the vicinity. The
search may take a little while. The devices detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothŸ name in the centre console display.
6. Select the external device you want to pair
with and press OK/MENU.
7. Enter the series of numbers that is shown
in the centre console display via the external device's keypad and press the external
device's button to confirm the selection.
The external device is paired and connected
automatically to the infotainment system.
To change the audio file you can press
/
on the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
Automatic connection
When the BluetoothŸ function is active and the
last external device connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the infotainment system searches for the last device connected its name is shown in the display. To
connect to another device, press EXIT. Con-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
nect a new external device, see "Change to
another external device" below.
Change to another external device
You can change a connected device with
another device if there are several devices in
the car. However, the device must first have
been paired, see "Pair and connect external
device" above. To change to another device:
1. Repeatedly press on MEDIA until
Bluetooth is shown, release and wait a
second or press OK/MENU.
2. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via BluetoothŸ, see the manual
for the external device.
3. Press OK/MENU.
4. Turn TUNE to Change unit, and confirm
with OK/MENU.
> After a while, the external device's name
is shown in the display. If several external devices have been paired then these
are also shown.
5. Select the device to be connected by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
> Connection of the external device takes
place.
To change the audio file you can press
/
on the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
05 Infotainment system
Media BluetoothŸ*
Remove the connected device
Scanning of audio files in external device
1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.
This function play backs the first ten seconds
of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu
Scan.
2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth
device and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Select the device to be removed by turning
TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> A prompt asking whether or not you
want to remove the connection is shown
in the display.
4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.
Cancel scanning with EXIT.
Version information BluetoothŸ
The car's current BluetoothŸ version can be
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth software version in car.
EXIT cancels.
Disconnecting the device
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
external device moves out of the infotainment
system's range. For more information on connection, see page 224.
05
Random
This function plays back the audio files on the
external device in random order. Activate/
deactivate the random function in Bluetooth
mode under Bluetooth menu Random.
To change the audio file you can press
/
on the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
225
05 Infotainment system
TV*
TV*
IMPORTANT
General
NOTE
A TV licence is required for this product in
some countries.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 204. For a description of
the remote control, see page 230.
NOTE
This system only supports TV transmissions
in countries which transmit signals in
mpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T standard. The system does not support TV transmissions in mpeg-4 format or analogue
transmissions.
Overview
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 244.
NOTE
05
The TV picture is only shown when the car
is stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed over about 6 km/h the picture disappears, No visual media available while
driving appears on the display, although
the audio is heard during this time. The picture reappears when the car has stopped.
Watch TV
Centre console control panel.
MEDIA key.
Station presets, numeric input
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage
level can also vary depending on where in
the country you are located.
Navigate in channel lists or menus by turning TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
the function in progress.
The next available channel is shown by
pressing
/
.
226
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If this is the first time the TV function is used or
the country of residence has changed then the
setting of TV channels must first be carried out.
To set the TV channels see the section
"Searching TV channels/Preset list" below.
Repeatedly press on MEDIA until TV is
shown in the display, release the button
and wait a second or press OK/MENU.
> A search starts and after a short while
the most recently used channel is
shown.
Changing channel
It is possible to change channel as follows:
05 Infotainment system
TV*
• Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels
in the area is shown. If any of these channels is already saved as a preset then its
preset number is shown to the right of the
channel name. Continue turning TUNE to
reach the desired channel and press OK/
MENU.
• By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).
• Via a short press on the
/
buttons
the next available channel in the area is
shown.
NOTE
If you have moved within the country, for
example, from one city to another, it is not
certain that the presets are available at the
new location as the frequency range may
have changed. You can then run another
scan and save a new preset list, see the
function "Automatic scan of TV channels"
below.
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset
buttons, it may be because the car is at a
location other than where the scan of TV
channels was run, for example, if you drove
from Germany to France. You may need to
choose a new country and re-run the scan.
sets) has now been created and is available. To change channel, see
page 226.
Searching TV channels/Preset list
NOTE
If this is the first time the TV function is used
then point 4 below will be arrived at automatically.
The scan and preset storage can be cancelled
with EXIT.
NOTE
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press
OK/MENU.
> If you have previously selected one or
more countries then these are shown in
a list.
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or
one of the previously selected countries.
Press OK/MENU.
> A list of all available countries is shown.
5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
Sweden) and press OK/MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a preset is shown. When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre-
If the country of residence has changed, a
new scan of TV channels must be run.
Channel management
The preset list can be edited. You can change
the order of the channels that are shown in the
preset list. A TV channel can have more than
one place in the preset list. The TV channels'
positions can also vary in the preset list.
05
To change the order in the preset list, go in TV
mode to TV menu Reorganise presets.
1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to
move in the list and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> The selected channel is highlighted.
2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
and confirm with OK/MENU.
> The channels change places with each
other.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
05 Infotainment system
TV*
After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the
other channels available in the area. You can
move a channel up to a place in the preset list.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
If you have moved within the country, for example, from one city to another, it is not certain
that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed.
You can then do another scan and save a new
preset list.
05
Scanning the TV channels
This function automatically scans through the
frequency range for all channels available in the
area where you are. When a channel is found,
it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before
scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with
EXIT, then the channel that you just watched
continues to be shown. Scanning does not
affect the preset list.
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu
Scan.
Information about the current
programme
By pressing the INFO button you can get the
information about the current programme, the
next programme and its start time. If you press
once more on the INFO button you can sometimes get additional information on the current
programme, such as start and end times and a
brief description of the current programme. For
more information on the INFO button, see
page 206.
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
Teletext
To return to the TV picture, wait several seconds or press EXIT.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these
steps:
Picture settings
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/
MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a preset is shown. When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 presets) has now been created and is available. To change channel, see
page 226.
1. Press the
trol.
You can adjust the settings for brightness, contrast, shade and colour. For more information,
see page 219.
button on the remote con-
2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the
number keys (0-9) to select page.
> The page is shown automatically.
You can go to the next page by entering a new
page number or by pressing the remote control
buttons
/
.
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing
the
button on the remote control.
The reception is lost
If the reception is lost for the TV channel being
watched the picture will freeze. Shortly after
this a message appears informing that the
reception has been lost for the current TV
channel, and a new search for the channel continues. When the reception returns the display
of the TV channel starts immediately. It is possible to change channel at any time when the
message is shown.
If the message Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has
228
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Infotainment system
TV*
detected that there is no reception for all TV
channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In this case, change
to the right country in accordance with
"Searching TV channels/Preset list", see
page 227.
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
05 Infotainment system
Remote control*
Remote control*
The remote control can be used for all functions in the infotainment system. The remote
control's buttons have the same functions as
the buttons in the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
When using the remote control, aim it at the
display (see page 202) in the centre console.
Key
Function
Scroll/rewind
Play/pause
Stop
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
05
Key
No function
Navigate in menus right/left
Change to navigation*
Confirm selection or go to the
menu system for the selected
source
Change to
free*
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To previous, cancels function,
deletes input characters
Navigate in menus up/down
Change to media source (Disc,
TV* etc.)
230
DVD disc's own menu
Function
Change to radio source (AM,
FM1 etc.)
Scroll wheel, corresponds to TUNEin the
centre console.
Scroll/fast forward
BluetoothŸ
hands-
Volume, decrease
Volume, increase
05 Infotainment system
Remote control*
Key
Function
0-9
Preset channels, number and letter input
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
Shortcuts for favourite setting.
Information about the current
programme, song, etc. Also used
even when there is more information available than can be
shown in the display.
Selection of language for soundtrack
Subtitles, selection of language
for text
Teletext*, On/Off
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
NOTE
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover
and slide the battery cover in the direction
of the infrared lens.
05
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and fit them.
3. Refit the cover.
NOTE
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and
depends on how much the remote control
is used.
The remote control is powered by four batteries of the AA-LR6 type.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
General
its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is
connected.
Phone functions, controls overview
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Menus
System overview.
Mobile phone
05
The menus inTEL are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel keypad*.
For general information on menu navigation
and menu structures, see page 244.
TEL - Activate/Disconnect
Steering wheel keypad
TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to
access the phone book, and to the left for
the call register for all calls; also used for
navigation among the options on the display.
BluetoothŸ1
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothŸ can
be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment
system. The infotainment system then works
handsfree, with the option to control a range of
the mobile phone's functions remotely. The
microphone used is located by the driver's sun
visor (2). The mobile phone can be operated by
232
Number and letter buttons
Microphone
Centre console control panel
1
Centre console control panel.
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Accept incoming calls, confirm your selection or go to the Phone menu by pressing
OK/MENU.
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes
input characters, leads up in the menu system and cancels the current function.
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 204. For a description of
the remote control, see page 230.
Remember
Activating/deactivating
A short press on TEL activates the handsfree
function. The
symbol indicates that the
handsfree function is active.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been connected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
There are two options for connecting a mobile
phone, either via the car's menu system or via
the mobile phone's menu system. If one does
not work then you can try the other.
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via BluetoothŸ, see the mobile phone's
manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the vehicle's handsfree function
by pressing TEL. Continue by pressing
OK/MENU.
3. Select, Change phone, press OK/
MENU.
> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been paired then
these are also shown. Press OK/
MENU.
Alternative 2 - via the mobile phone's menu
system
1. Activate the handsfree function by pressing TEL in the centre console. If there is a
phone connected, disconnect the connected phone.
2. Make the car detectable/visible via
BluetoothŸ, press OK/MENU and activate
the Phone settings Discoverable
option.
4. Check that the mobile phone's
BluetoothŸ function is switched on and
press OK/MENU.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothŸ name in the display. The handsfree function's
BluetoothŸ name is shown in the mobile
phone as My Car.
3. Search with the mobile phone's
BluetoothŸ function, see the mobile phone
manual.
5. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
centre console display.
6. Select to connect to My Car from the
mobile phone.
6. Enter the series of numbers that is shown
in the centre console display via the mobile
phone's keypad and press the mobile
phone button to confirm the selection.
The mobile phone is paired (registered) and
connects automatically to the audio system.
For more information about how mobile
phones are paired, see page 235.
4. Select My Car in the list of units detected
in your mobile phone.
05
5. Enter an optional PIN code on your mobile
phone via the mobile phone's keypad
when prompted to enter the PIN code.
Then key in the same PIN code via the car's
keypad.
When the connection is established the mobile
phone's BluetoothŸ name is shown in the dis``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
233
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
play. Now the mobile phone can be controlled
from the audio system.
To call
When the mobile phone has been disconnected an ongoing call can be continued by
using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
and speaker.
1. Make sure that the
symbol appears
at the top of the display and that the handsfree function is in phone mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or speed
dial number, see page 239. Or in normal
view you can turn TUNE to the right to
access the phone book, and to the left for
the call register for all calls. For information
on the phone book, see page 236.
NOTE
Even when your mobile phone has been
manually disconnected, some mobile
phones may automatically couple up to the
last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a
new call begins.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
234
muted.
• Mobile phone - the call is transferred from
handsfree to the mobile phone. For some
mobile phones the connection is interrupted. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
• Dial number - option to call a third party
using the number keys (current call set in
standby).
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. In normal view,
turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register
for All calls .
Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even
if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA mode.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
The handsfree function is deactivated when
the engine is switched off or when a door is
opened2.
2
• Mute - audio system microphone is
Incoming call
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. The connection to the mobile phone can
be interrupted manually via a long press on
TEL or in phone mode under Phone main
menu Phone off. For more information on
connection, see page 235.
Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to
access the following functions:
Making and receiving calls
3. Press OK/MENU.
05
In call menu
Only Keyless Drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone main menu Call options
Auto answer.
In phone mode you can see all call lists under
Phone main menu Call list:
•
•
•
•
•
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled calls in reverse order.
vate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone
main menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.
Ring volume
Voice mailbox
In normal view a speed dial number for the
voice mailbox can be programmed in and then
accessed later via a long press on 1.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone
mode under Phone main menu Call
options Voicemail number Change
number. If there is no number stored then this
menu can be reached with one long press on
1.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone call volume can only be changed
during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*
or turn the VOL control.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
by turning VOL.
If an audio source is active during an incoming
call then it can be muted automatically. Acti3
In phone mode go to Phone main menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press
EXIT to save.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected in phone mode under
Phone main menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring
signal 1 etc.
More on pairing and connecting
A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired (registered). Pairing is performed once
per phone. After pairing the phone no longer
needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of
one mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. If the last connected
mobile phone is not available then the system
will try to connect a mobile phone that was
paired earlier. When the audio system
searches for the last phone connected its name
is shown in the display.
05
Manual connection
If you want to change the connected mobile
phone, go in phone mode to Phone main
menu Change phone.
NOTE
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on
the phone connected will not be switched
off when one of the inbuilt signals for the
handsfree system is used.
Remove the device
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal3, go in phone mode to Phone main
menu Phone settings Sounds and
volume Ring signals Mobile phone
ring signal.
A connected mobile phone can be deregistered and removed. This is performed in phone
mode under Phone main menu Remove
Bluetooth device.
Not supported by all mobile phones.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
Version information BluetoothŸ
NOTE
The car's current BluetoothŸ version can be
seen in phone mode under Phone main menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
Changes made from the car to a record in
the mobile phone's telephone book will
result in a new record in the car's telephone
book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the
phone. From the car, this will now look like
you have double records, with different
icons. Note also that if you save a shortcut
number or change a contact, this will result
in a new record in the car's telephone book.
Phone book
There are two phone books. These are merged
into one in the car and are displayed as a single
phone book in the car.
• The car downloads the mobile phone's
05
phone book and only displays this phone
book when the mobile phone from which
this phone book was downloaded is connected.
• The car also has a built-in phone book. This
contains all the contacts stored in the car
irrespective of which phone was connected when saving them. These contacts
are visible for all users, regardless of the
mobile phone that is connected to the car.
If a contact is saved in the car then the
is shown in front of the consymbol
tact in the phone book.
All use of the phone book requires that the
symbol appears at the top of the display
and that the handsfree function is in phone
mode.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each paired mobile phone. The
phone book can be copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection.
Activate/deactivate the function in phone
mode under Phone main menu Phone
settings Download phone book.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Quick search for contacts
If you turn TUNE to the right in normal view
then a list of contacts is obtained. Turn TUNE
to select and press OK/MENU to call.
236
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Under the name of the contact is the phone
number that is selected by default. If the symbol
appears to the right of the contact then
there are several phone numbers stored for the
contact. If you want to change and dial a different number than the one that is selected by
on the control
default, press the button
panel in the centre console. Then turn TUNE to
select and press OK/MENU to call.
You can search in the list of contacts by using
the centre console's keypad to key in the start
of the contact's name (see "Character table
keypad in centre console" for button functions).
The list of contacts can also be accessed from
normal view by pressing and holding the button
on the centre console's keypad with the letter
the searched contact starts with. For example,
a long press on the button for 6 gives instant
access to that part of the list where you will find
contacts with the letter M.
Character table keypad in centre
console
Key
Function
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
Key
Function
Searching for contacts
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.
DEFÈÉ3
GHIÌ4
JKL5
1. Turn 4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. You can also use
the number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console.
MNOÖØÑÒ6
PQRSß7
TUVÜÙ8
WXYZ9
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The
result of the search is shown in the phone
book (3).
Search contacts using the text wheel.
Character list
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Phone book
Shift between upper and lower
case letter.
+0pw
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
mode to Phone main menu Phone book
Search.
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to go to the phone
book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see
explanation in the table below) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
05
#*
4
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
237
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
123/
ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
New contact
2. Turn 4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. You can also use
the number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console.
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
press OK/MENU to see the
saved numbers and other information.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
05
If you press a number key in the centre console
when the text wheel is shown (see illustration
above), a new character list (1) appears in the
display. Continue repeatedly pressing the
number key to the desired letter and then
release. Continue with the next letter and so
on. If you have pressed one key you can press
another key to confirm the input of the previous
one.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
4
238
1. When the Name row is selected, press
OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illustration above).
3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The
name entered is shown in the input field (2)
in the display.
Entering letters for New contact.
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Input field
New contacts can be added in phone mode
under Phone main menu Phone book
New contact.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. To change the input mode to numbers,
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn
TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the table below) in the list (1) and
then press OK/MENU.
When you have finished typing the name,
select OK from the list on the display (1) and
press OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone number in the same way as above.
When the telephone number has been entered,
press OK/MENU and select a telephone number type (Mobile phone, Home, Work or
General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
When all details have been filled in, press
EXIT to save the contact.
05 Infotainment system
BluetoothŸ handsfree*
123/
ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
OK
Save and go back to Add contact with OK/MENU.
Change between uppercase and
lowercase letters with OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU, the cursor
moves to the input field (2) at the
top of the display. The cursor can
now be moved, with TUNE, to
the appropriate place to e.g.
insert new letters or delete with
EXIT. To be able to insert new
letters you must first go back to
the input mode, by pressing OK/
MENU.
Speed dial numbers
Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers
under Phone main menu Phone book
Speed dial.
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be performed in phone mode using the number keys
on the keypad in the centre console, by pressing a number key and then pressing OK/
MENU. If a contact is not stored for the speed
dial number you are dialling then you are
prompted to save a contact for the selected
speed dial number.
Receiving a vCard
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's
phone book from other mobile phones (other
than the one currently connected to the car). In
order to allow this the car is set to visible mode
for BluetoothŸ. The function is activated in
phone mode under Phone main menu
Phone book Receive vCard.
Memory status
Memory status of the car's phone book and the
connected mobile phone's phone book can be
seen in phone mode under Phone main menu
Phone book Memory status.
05
Delete phone book
The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
carried out in phone mode under Phone main
menu Phone book Clear phone book.
NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only deletes contacts in the car's telephone book. It
does not delete contacts in the mobile
phone's telephone book.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
05 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
Introduction
The infotainment system's voice recognition1
allows you to voice-activate certain functions
in a BluetoothŸ-connected mobile phone or in
Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System).
NOTE
•
05
•
The information in this section
describes the use of voice commands
to control a mobile phone connected
using BluetoothŸ. For detailed information on using a mobile phone connected using BluetoothŸ with the car's
Infotainment system see page 232.
The Volvo navigation system RTI (Road
and Traffic Information System) has a
separate user manual which contains
more information on voice control and
voice commands to control that system.
WARNING
Remember
The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
The voice recognition system provides access
to several functions in BluetoothŸ handsfree
and Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System), while the driver
can keep his/her hands on the steering wheel.
The input data are in dialogue form with spoken
commands from the user and verbal replies
from the system. The voice recognition system
uses the same microphone as the BluetoothŸ
handsfree system (see illustration on page
232) and the voice recognition system's replies
come via the car's front speakers.
As the microphone is positioned directly in
front of/above the driver, voice commands
spoken by other passengers in the car are not
understood.
Voice commands offer convenience and help
the driver to avoid being distracted, and
instead concentrate on driving and focus
attention on the road and traffic conditions.
Steering wheel keypad.
Button for voice recognition
To activate the system
Before voice commands to a mobile phone can
be used the mobile phone must be paired and
connected via BluetoothŸ handsfree. If a telephone command is given and no mobile
phones are paired, then the system will provide
information about this. For information on pairing and connecting a mobile phone, see
page 233.
• Press the button for voice recognition (1) in
order to activate the system and initiate a
dialogue with voice commands. The sys-
1
240
Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
tem will then display commonly used commands in the display in the centre console.
Help functions for voice recognition
• Instructions: A function that helps you get
Keep the following things in mind when you use
the voice recognition system:
familiar with the system and the procedure
for giving commands.
• For a command - speak after the tone, with
• Voice training: A function that enables the
voice recognition system to learn to know
your voice and your accent. The function
also provides an opportunity to create user
profiles. Two user profiles can be created.
normal voice at normal speed.
• Do not talk when the system is replying.
• The car's doors, windows and sunroof*
must be closed.
• Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
If the driver is unsure of which command to
use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system
then responds with a few different commands which can be used in the current situation.
The help functions can be accessed by pressing the MY CAR button on the control panel in
the centre console and then turning TUNE to
the desired menu option.
instructions
The instructions can be started in two ways:
NOTE
•
•
•
saying "Cancel"
not speaking
pressing the Voice control button on the
steering wheel.
•
Exit the instructions by means of a long press
on the button for voice recognition.
Voice training
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for
you to say. Voice training can be started in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice training. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description
of the menu system, see page 127.
After voice training has been completed,
remember to set your user profile under Voice
user setting.
05
Additional settings in MY CAR
This instruction can be started only when
the car is parked.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press
the button for voice recognition and say
"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by saying "Previous".
• User setting - Two user profiles can be
Press the button for Voice recognition and
say "Instructions".
• Activate the instructions in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice tutorial. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
which take around 5 minutes in total to complete. The system starts with the first lesson.
set, the function is activated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice user setting. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.
• Voice volume - Can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice output
volume. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
241
05 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
Using voice commands
Dial a number
Dialling from the call register
The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice
commands by pressing the button for voice
recognition (see illustration on page 240).
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced
individually, in groups of several numbers at a
time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers
greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the
system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not possible.
This function allows you to make a phone call
from one of your mobile phone's call registers.
The following is an example of a dialogue with
voice commands. The system's reply will vary
depending on the situation.
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Call a contact
Once a dialogue has been started, commonly
used commands will be shown in the display.
Greyed-out text or text within brackets is not
included in the spoken command.
When the driver becomes accustomed to the
system, he/she can speed up the command
dialogue and skip the prompts from the system, by briefly pressing the button for voice
recognition.
05
Phone > call from the call register
or
Phone call from the call register
Commands can be given in several ways
or
The command "Phone call contact" can be
pronounced as e.g.:
Phone call number
This function gives you the facility to call predefined contacts. The contacts must be created in your mobile phone, see your mobile
phone's user manual if necessary.
System reply
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
• "Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait
Number?
Phone > call contact
User action
or
Start saying the numbers in the phone number.
If you say several numbers and pause, the system will repeat them, and ask you to say "Continue".
Phone call contact
Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
finish the command by saying "Call".
Consider the following when you call a contact:
for the system's reply, and then continue
by saying "Call contact."
or
• "Phone call contact" - Say the whole command in one sequence.
The following is a list of functions that can be
controlled using voice recognition with a
BluetoothŸ-connected mobile phone.
Phone > call number
• You can also change the number by saying
the commands "Correct" (which deletes
the last spoken group of numbers) or
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken
phone number).
242
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
• If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the dis-
05 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
play in the numbered rows and the system
prompts you to select a row number.
• If there are more rows in the list than can
be displayed simultaneously, saying
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the list
(and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in
the list).
Calling voice mailbox
This function allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages. The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the BluetoothŸ function, see page 235.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
05
Phone > call voice mailbox
or
Phone call voice mailbox
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
05 Infotainment system
Menu navigation, Infotainment
To navigate in the menus
Controls in the centre console
The infotainment system's functions are controlled via the system's menus. Each source in
the infotainment system (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA)
has its own separate menus. To access the
menus and activate a function you must first
have selected a source (e.g. RADIO/FM1).
Then press OK/MENU for access into the
menu for the selected source.
Audio settings Equalizer, which requires
that the following is carried out beforehand:
1. Select a source by pressing one of the buttons (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.). By continuing to press you can scroll down
among the options on the display (e.g.
FM1), release and wait a second and the
selection is accepted automatically. Alternatively, you can turn TUNE and confirm
with OK/MENU.
The menu options are selected by means of the
buttons in the centre console or via the steering
wheel keypad*. The functions are described
under their respective sections.
RADIO
05
MEDIA
TEL
TUNE
2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE, or use
the thumbwheel* on the steering wheel
keypad to reach the desired menu option
e.g. Audio settings and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE again to reach the desired submenu, e.g. Equalizer, and press OK/
MENU.
OK/MENU
Menus RADIO
Search paths
The search paths to the menu functions are
specified in the owner's manual with the form:
Main menu AM
AM menu
Show presets1
Scan
1
244
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Infotainment system
Menu navigation, Infotainment
Audio settings2
Sound
stage3
Equalizer4
Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM1/FM2
Reset all FM settings
Audio
DAB menu
Ensemble learn
PTY filtering
Turn off PTY filtering
TP (traffic information)
Show radio text
presets1
Show radio text
Show
Main menu CD Audio
Random
Scan
Audio settings5
Main menu CD/DVD1 Data
Disc menu
Random
Repeat folder
Scan
Change subtitles
News settings
Advanced settings
DAB band
Scan
REG
Sub channels
Audio settings5
Alternative frequency
Show PTY text
EON
Reset all DAB settings
Audio settings5
PTY settings
05
Change soundtrack
DAB linking
Set TP favourite
2
3
4
1
5
presets1
Advanced settings
Scan
Menus MEDIA
Disc menu
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*
FM menu
Show
settings5
Main menu DVD1 Video
Disc menu
DVD disc menu
Play/Pause/Continue
The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources.
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
Does not apply to Performance.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
05 Infotainment system
Menu navigation, Infotainment
Audio settings5
Subtitles
Audio tracks
Advanced settings
Main menu Media Bluetooth4
Bluetooth menu
Auto play
Random
Angle
Change unit
DivX® VOD code
Remove Bluetooth device
Audio settings5
Scan
Main menu iPod4
Bluetooth software version in car
iPod menu
Audio settings5
Scan
Main menu AUX
AUX menu
Audio settings5
Main menu USB4
USB menu
Audio settings5
246
Phone main menu
Call list
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Main menu TV*
Receive vCard
TV menu
Memory status
Random
Select country
Repeat folder
Reorganise presets
Change phone
Select USB device
Autostore
Remove Bluetooth device
Change subtitles
Scan
Phone settings
Change soundtrack
Audio settings5
Scan
5
4
Main menu BluetoothŸ handsfree4
Phone book
Random
05
Menus TEL
For submenus, see "Main menu AM".
Does not apply to Performance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Clear phone book
Discoverable
05 Infotainment system
Menu navigation, Infotainment
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in
car
Call options
Auto answer
Voicemail number
Phone off
05
247
Recommendations during driving.........................................................
Refuelling..............................................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Cargo area ...........................................................................................
Driving with a trailer..............................................................................
Towing and recovery.............................................................................
248
250
253
254
257
259
260
266
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
06 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
• Avoid driving with open windows.
• Do not use winter tyres when the winter
season is over.
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
• Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
06
to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
• A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
• Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
250
• Cars with the D5 engine and 6-speed manual transmission are started in 2nd gear
under normal conditions.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 12 and 330.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
• Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the water
to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see page 260.
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high the instrument panel's
warning symbol is illuminated and there is
a text message displayed there High
engine temp Stop safely - stop the car in
a safe way and allow the engine to run at
idling speed for several minutes to cool
down.
06 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
• If the text message High engine temp
•
•
•
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
the instrument panel's warning symbol and
there is a text message displayed there
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely - follow
the recommendation given and lower the
speed and stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool
down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
Open boot lid
WARNING
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
• Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
Do not overload the battery
or other fluid).
The electrical functions in the car load the battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key
position II when the engine is switched off.
Instead use the I mode - which uses less
power.
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
• Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text Low battery Power save
mode. The energy-saving function then shuts
down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
• The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum
antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.
06
• The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 327.
``
251
06 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
• The condition of the battery and charge
level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
• Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all four wheels
if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
06
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
252
06 During your journey
Refuelling
Refuelling
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
Opening/closing the fuel cap
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel - the flap opens when the button
is released.
The filler flap is located on the right-hand rear
wing, as indicated by the information display's
.
arrow by the symbol
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a
click confirms that it is closed.
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate
the green cord with handle.
2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly.
After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one
or more clicking sounds are heard.
06
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
253
06 During your journey
Fuel
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical
attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
06
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
254
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion, and
together with the three-way catalytic converter
reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in
exceptional cases.
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
06 During your journey
Fuel
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
•
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
•
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants, such as excessively high volumes
of sulphur particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use
diesel of dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
1
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position
(see page 74).
2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
•
•
•
•
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
Special additives
Marine Diesel Fuel
Fuel oil
RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
06
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
``
255
06 During your journey
Fuel
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. Socalled "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automatically at an interval of approximately
300-900 km depending on driving conditions.
Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It
may take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
06
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message
Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motor-
256
way. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can
be difficult to start the engine and the filter
will be incapable of functioning. Then there
is a risk that the filter will have to be
replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. See information on weights
page 323 and table page 330.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
06 During your journey
Loading
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 323.
The boot lid is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote control key, see page 56.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and distribution of
the load.
To bear in mind when loading
• Position the load firmly against the backrest in front.
• Put wide loads in the centre.
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 76.
Roof load
WARNING
Using load carriers
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
WARNING
• Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into
a drive position - and the car could then
move off.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
06
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information on maximum permitted roof
load, including load carriers and any space
box, see page 323.
``
257
06 During your journey
Loading
Lowering the rear seat backrest
Bag holder*
12 V electrical socket*
If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered,
see page 78.
Load retaining eyelets
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and
prevents them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
06
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor
hatch.
2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the
carrying handle in the hooks.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are
loose or protrude could cause injury during
heavy braking. Always secure large and
heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo
retaining straps.
258
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Raise the cover to access the electrical socket.
The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
NOTE
Remember not to use the electrical socket
with the engine switched off because of the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
06 During your journey
Cargo area
Ski hatch
Attaching the hatch
The hatch in the backrest can be opened to
transport long narrow items.
Refit the hatch in the grooves behind the
upholstery and close the hatch.
Fold the right-hand backrest forward.
Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest
by sliding the bolt up while pressing the
hatch down/forward.
Fold back the backrest with the hatch
open.
Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from moving.
06
WARNING
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading and unloading. Otherwise the
gear lever/selector can accidentally be
knocked and moved to a driving position.
Removing the hatch
After the hatch has been released and the
backrest folded backwards, open the hatch
approx. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.
259
06 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 323.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.
• The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies
with the specified maximum towball load.
06
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 276.
• The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
• The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
260
• For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instrument
panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes
faster than normal and the display shows the
text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 324.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
- otherwise the oil temperature may
become too high.
06 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
Diesel engine 5-cyl
Parking on a hill
• In the event of a risk of overheating the
1. Depress the foot brake.
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000
rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
•
Follow the installation instructions carefully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Automatic gearbox
4. Release the foot brake.
Overheating
• Move the gear selector to park position P
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
• Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
• In the event of overheating a warning symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - follow the
recommendation given.
Important checks
• The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
Starting on a hill
greased regularly.
1. Depress the foot brake.
Steep inclines
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
• Do not lock the automatic transmission in
3. Release the parking brake.
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the towball.
06
Towing bracket
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
110.
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see
page 263.
``
261
06 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
Specifications
G021485
Storing the detachable towbar
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
06
262
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A
998
B
80
C
854
D
427
E
109
F
282
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
06 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
The indicator window must show red.
G021490
G018928
G021488
Attaching the towbar
The indicator window must show green.
G021487
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G000000
G021489
Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
06
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
``
263
06 During your journey
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling
it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
06
G021495
G021494
Driving with a trailer
Safety cable.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
until you hear a click.
anticlockwise
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
Removing the towbar
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
264
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 262.
06 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
G018929
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves
to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
page 148.
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking
occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is
a risk of it occurring at lower speeds
(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
TSA system continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually
braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer
combination. This is often enough to help the
driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is once again stable, the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again
has full control of the car.
NOTE
TSA is deactivated if the driver selects
Sport mode, see page 148.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because in such a situation the TSA
system cannot determine whether it is the
trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA is working.
06
Miscellaneous
The TSA system can engage within the speed
interval 60 to 160 km/h.
265
06 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Towing
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
1. Press the remote control key into the ignition switch to unlock the steering lock so
that the car can be steered, see page 74.
2. The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
Manual gearbox
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic
IMPORTANT
WARNING
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
The steering lock must be unlocked
before towing.
•
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch while driving or
when the car is being towed.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox, Powershift
The 2.0T model with Powershift automatic
transmission should not be towed as the transmission is dependent on the engine running in
order to receive sufficient lubrication.
266
Avoid towing.
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
06
IMPORTANT
WARNING
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
•
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
•
In the event of moving a longer distance
than 10 km, the car must be transported
with the drive wheels raised from the
road - professional recovery is recommended.
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see page 106.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the catalytic converter.
06 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
must be opened in different ways:
• Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
• The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using
a coin or similar - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
NOTE
On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing
eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket.
Attach the towrope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the
detachable towbar's towball in the car.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
•
An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised
front suspension must not be towed at
speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be
towed further than 50 km.
06
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
IMPORTANT
Remove the front and rear covers.
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
267
General .................................................................................................
Changing wheels ..................................................................................
Tyre pressure .......................................................................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*..........................................................
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*........................................................
Emergency puncture repair (TMK) .......................................................
268
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
270
274
276
277
278
280
WHEELS AND TYRES
07 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
New tyres
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and
dimensions, and also the same make, are
fitted to all four wheels.
Direction of rotation
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 333.
Tyre care
G021778
Tyre age
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
07
270
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
L for left and R for right.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 276. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control
of the car.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.
Tools
G021829
Wear and maintenance
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.
Located under the cargo area floor are the
car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
There is also space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.
07
Jack*
The jack's thread must always be well greased.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
07 Wheels and tyres
General
Tools - returning into place
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,
the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all
four wheels.
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millimetres.
07
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
272
The car has whole vehicle approval. This
means that certain combinations of wheels and
tyres are approved. For the permissible combinations, see page 332
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
16
Rim diameter in
inches
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Using snow chains
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Specifications
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Tyre dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.
215
Tyre width (mm)
55
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
07 Wheels and tyres
General
16
Rim diameter in inches (")
97
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
270 km/h).
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load,
a load index (LI). The car's weight determines
the load capacity required of the tyres. Minimum permitted index is specified in the table,
see page 332.
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed
rating is specified in the table, see page 332.
The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
without), where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not
be driven faster than the speed rating of the
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a
maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is
stated in the table.
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
V
240 km/h
W
270 km/h
Y
300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
07
273
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 277 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
5. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
2. Take out the jack* and wheel wrench* that
are located under the cargo area floor in
the cargo area. If another jack is selected,
see page 286.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
3. Remove any full hubcaps.
4. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
for example.
If the car has full hubcaps then these should be
removed.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Installation
07
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
274
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car
- or preferably a crash barrier - between
them and the road.
5. Refit any full hubcaps.
NOTE
The hubcap outlet for the valve must be
located over the valve on the rim when fitted.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one temporary spare wheel.
Spare wheel*
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 333.
The spare wheel* is supplied in a bag which
must be strapped in the cargo area during the
journey. Complete information is delivered
together with the spare wheel. Read the
instructions included with the tyre bag.
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
Taking out the spare wheel:
1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel
from the cargo area and remove it from the
spare wheel bag.
2. Fold up the cargo area floor.
3. Lift the tools and jack out from the foam
block.
Place the damaged wheel in the tyre bag and
strap it down with the tensioning straps. Be
sure to follow the instructions contained in the
manual in the spare wheel bag when it is refitted.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
275
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure is recommended (applies for both full
load and light load) in order to obtain optimum
fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
G021830
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This is
also specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 333.
• Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
• ECO pressure1
07
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
1
276
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several
kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of
the boot lid with two clips.
Detach the warning triangle case by pulling
both of the snap latches outwards.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
07
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*
General
Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring
2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)*
warns the driver when the pressure is too low
in one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors
located inside the air valve in each wheel.
When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the
system detects the tyre pressure. If the preson the
sure is too low then a warning lamp
instrument panel illuminates and a message is
shown on the display.
Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in
order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recommendations, when driving with a heavy load for
example.
3. Drive at least at 40 km/h for a total of at
least 1 minute and check that the message
disappears.
Always check the system after changing a
wheel in order to ensure that replacement
wheels work with the system.
The settings are made with the control in the
centre console, see page 127.
For information on correct tyre pressures, see
page 333.
The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.
IMPORTANT
07
If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure
system a warning lamp
on the instrument panel will illuminate and a message
will be shown. This can be for various reasons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with
a sensor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure
monitoring system.
NOTE
The engine must not be running when the
tyres are calibrated.
1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure
and select key position I or II.
Deactivating/activating tyre pressure
monitoring
NOTE
The engine must not be running when tyre
pressure monitoring is activated/deactivated.
The settings are made with the control in the
centre console, see page 127.
2. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
the menus to Settings Tyre pressure
1. Select key position I or II.
3. Select Calibrate tyre pressure.
2. Select the system MY CAR to open the
menus to Car settings Tyre pressure
4. Press OK.
5. Start the car and drive at least at 40 km/h
for a total of at least 1 minute and check
that the message disappears.
> Calibration is complete.
3. Select Tyre pressure system and press
OK.
> A X is shown in the display if the system
is activated, the option disappears if the
system is deactivated.
Rectifying low tyre pressure
Recommendations
If a message for low tyre pressure is shown in
the display:
Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with
TPMS sensors in the valves.
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.
• If wheels without TPMS sensors are used
then Tyre press. syst Service required
278
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*
will be shown every time the car is driven
faster than 40 km/h for more than 10
minutes.
Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult
to see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish
which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.
• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are
fitted to all wheels on the car.
• Volvo recommends that sensors are not
moved between different wheels.
WARNING
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS,
hold the nozzle of the pump directly against
the valve to avoid damaging the valve.
Driveable punctured tyres*
If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST)* have
been selected then the car is also equipped
with TPMS.
WARNING
SST tyres should only be fitted by individuals with expertise on SST tyres.
SST tyres must only be fitted together with
TPMS.
After a fault message on low tyre pressure
has been shown, do not drive faster than
80 km/h.
Maximum driving distance to tyre change is
80 km.
Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking
or turning.
SST tyres must be replaced if they are damaged or punctured.
This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side
wall that makes continued driving possible to
a limited extent despite the tyre losing some
pressure. These tyres are fitted on a special
rim. (Normal tyres can also be fitted to this rim).
07
If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yellow TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illuminates and a message is shown in the text
panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to
max. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as
soon as possible.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
General
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
Overview
12 V sockets* for connecting the compressor
are located by the centre console in the front,
by the rear seat and in the cargo area. Choose
the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a
compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The
kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing
fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
07
NOTE
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location. The emergency
puncture repair kit is located under the floor in
the cargo area.
Switch
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
280
Label, maximum permitted speed
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
Sealing punctured tyres
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
G014338
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
07
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
``
281
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
tyre pressure table, see page 333 (1
bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the
dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
07
• If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the
282
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the
workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see page 333. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.)
6. Detach the air hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
07
283
Engine compartment.............................................................................
Lamps...................................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Car care................................................................................................
284
286
293
299
301
304
312
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start
automatically some time after the engine
has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack other than one recommended by Volvo
is selected, then follow the instructions
included with the equipment
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; position the jack against the front edge on the
engine's subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points on the door sill.
See preceding illustration.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
•
•
•
08
286
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the
left-hand side.
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
Engine compartment, overview
WARNING
High voltage from the ignition system. The
voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The remote control key must always
be in 0 position when work is being done in
the engine compartment, see page 74.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the remote control key is in II position
or when the engine is hot.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees
clockwise. You will hear when the catch
releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see illustration.)
Checking the engine oil
The appearance of the engine compartment may
vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator
Filler opening for engine oil
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box, engine compartment
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 326.
08
Filling washer fluid
Air filter
``
287
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
IMPORTANT
Change the engine oil in accordance with the
intervals specified in the Service and Warranty
Booklet.
Filling and dipstick
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled
must have the same grade, see page 327.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
G021734
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
IMPORTANT
Dipstick and filler pipe, petrol engine.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts. Certain models have both variants. Contact a
Volvo dealer for more information.
08
1
288
Diesel engines have an electronic dipstick.
G021736
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Dipstick1 and filler pipe, diesel engine.
The most accurate measurements are made on
a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately
after the engine is switched off. The dipstick
will indicate that the level is too low because
the oil has not had time to flow down into the
oil sump.
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil consumption may increase if too much oil is
poured into the engine.
WARNING
G021737
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
Park the car on a level surface, switch off the
engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil
time to run back to the sump. For capacities,
see page 327 and onwards.
Checking with a cold engine
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must
be between the MIN and MAX marks.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
Checking with a warm engine
1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off
the engine and wait 10 - 15 minutes to
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Wipe the dipstick clean.
3. Check the oil level using the dipstick.
4. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
For engines with electronic dipstick2
Checking the oil level:
1. Switch the ignition to key position II, see
page 104.
2. Turn the thumbwheel to position Engine
oil level Wait....
> The oil level in the engine is then shown.
NOTE
The oil level is only updated by the system
during driving. The system cannot detect
changes when oil is filled or drained.
If engine oil is filled or drained then the car
must be driven about 30 km before the oil
level is measured correctly.
Message
Engine oil level OK
All normal.
Engine oil level
Wait...
System initialised,
shown for
about 2 seconds.
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see page 124.
08
2
Only applies to diesel.
``
289
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
Message
Engine oil level Fill
1 litre oil
Fill with engine oil
Engine oil level
Service required
Shown when the
system has
detected something
that needs to be rectified in order to enable the correct information regarding oil
volume to be shown.
Coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see
page 328.
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. High temperatures may occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.
Checking and topping up the coolant
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 328.
Check the coolant regularly
08
290
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the
inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
Filling
Power steering fluid
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 328. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
Brake fluid reservoir location.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold section in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened.
08
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
``
291
08 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 328.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the engine is switched off and
the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
08
292
08 Maintenance and service
Lamps
General
Headlamps front
For bulb specification, see page 298. Bulbs
and spotlights that are of a special type or that
are only suitable for replacement by a workshop are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING
Always switch off the ignition and remove
the remote control key before starting to
replace a bulb.
General interior lighting in the roof
Removing the headlamp
Reading lamps
Glovebox lighting
1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
quickly.
Courtesy lighting
2. (Upper illustration)
Direction indicators, door mirror
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Approach lighting, door mirror
Release the headlamp by alternately
tilting and pulling it out.
Xenon, Active Xenon and LED lamps
WARNING
IMPORTANT
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, headlamp replacement must be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended. The lamp must be handled with extreme caution because it is
equipped with a high voltage unit.
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
3. (Lower illustration)
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand.
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
whole headlamp.
4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.
08
5. Replace the bulb in question, .
``
293
08 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Installing the headlamp
Removing the cover
Dipped beam, halogen
1. Plug in the connector. A clicking sound
should be heard.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 293.
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 293.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
The short pin is fitted closest to the grille.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
1. Unscrew the cover's four screws with the
tool (1) in the tool kit, see page 270. They
should not be detached completely.
(3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)
3. Check the lighting.
The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Use the tool in the toolkit to remove and fit
this successfully.
2. Slide the cover to one side.
3. Remove the cover.
08
294
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. The guide pin on the lamp should be
straight up when it is fitted and a clicking
sound should be heard when it clicks into
place.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
08 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Main beam, Halogen
Extra main beam, Xenon*
Direction indicators/flashers
1. Detach the headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the cover, see page 294.
2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can be secured in one position.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb to
detach it.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
295
08 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Lamp housing, rear
NOTE
Reversing lamp
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Location of rear bulbs
1. Open the panel in the boot lid.
The bulbs in the rear light cluster are replaced
from inside the cargo area (not the LED lamps).
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise.
1. Remove the covers in the left/right-hand
panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are
located in a bulb holder.
2. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
08
296
5. Press the bulb holder into place and refit
the cover.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
Brake light (LED)
Brake light
Reversing lamp
Direction indicators
Rear fog lamp (one side)
4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
5. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
08 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Number plate lighting
Lighting, cargo area
Vanity mirror lighting
G021758
Removing the mirror glass
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lens.
3. Pull the bulb straight out and replace with
a new one.
Fitting the lens
1. Refit the lens.
2. Press it into place.
08
``
297
08 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Specification, bulbs
Lighting
W
Type
Extra main beam,
Xenon, ABL
65
H9
Dipped beam, halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam, Halogen
65
H9
Front direction
indicators
21
HY21W
Cargo area lighting, number plate
lighting
5
Tubular
lamp
Vanity mirror
Glovebox lighting
SV8.5
1.2
w2x4.6d
12v
5
Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
08
298
Direction indicators, rear
21
SVPY21W
rear fog lamp
21
H21W
Lighting
W
Type
Reversing lamp
21
H21W
Brake light
21
P21W LL
08 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Wiper blades
Service position
Replacing the wiper blades
Lift up the wiper arm. Press the button
located on the wiper blade mounting and
pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
0, see page 74, and keep the remote control key in the ignition switch.
2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for
about 1 second. The wipers then move to
standing straight up.
The wipers return to the starting position when
the car is started.
G021763
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they
must be in service position.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the
blade on the passenger side.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 312 and onwards.
08
``
299
08 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so
that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,
reservoir and hoses.
08
300
For capacities, see page 328.
08 Maintenance and service
Battery
Warning symbols on the battery
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Use protective goggles.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.
WARNING
Risk of explosion.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
NOTE
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if the jump leads are connected incorrectly, is sufficient to make the
battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes,
seek medical attention immediately.
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally responsible manner - it
contains lead.
Operation
The battery contains corrosive acid.
• Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
• Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
08
``
301
08 Maintenance and service
Battery
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
Changing
Removal
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
08
302
08 Maintenance and service
Battery
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and
negative cables in the correct sequence.
3. Secure the battery using the battery clamp.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
Detach the black negative cable
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery
8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See
Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
08
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
303
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General
Location, fuse boxes
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
08
304
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a
right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glovebox changes sides.
Under the glovebox
Engine compartment
Cargo area
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Engine compartment
08
``
305
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General fuses, engine compartment
Function
A
Function
A
Primary fuse CEM KL30B
50
Headlamp levelling*
(Xenon, Active Xenon)
10
Primary fuse CEM KL30A
50
Primary fuse CEM
20
Engine compartment, upper
Primary fuse RJBA KL30
60
ABS 15-feed
5
Engine compartment, front
Primary fuse CJB KL30
60
60
Speed related power
steering*
5
Primary fuse CJB 15E
KL30
Engine Control Module
(ECM), transm. SRS
10
-
PTC Air preheater*
100
Heated washer nozzles*
10
Headlamp washers*
20
Vacuum pump 5-cyl Petrol
Turbo and GTDI
5
Windscreen wipers
30
Lighting panel
5
Parking heater*
25
-
-
Ventilation fan
40
-
-
-
-
Relay, engine compartment box
5
Auxiliary lamps*
20
Horn
15
On the inside of the cover are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in
are located under
.
• Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised
Volvo workshop.
• 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and
the recommendation for changing is that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
• 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 are of the "MiniFuse"
-
type.
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a
right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glovebox changes sides.
-
-
ABS pump
40
ABS valves
20
08
-
306
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
-
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Engine Control Module
(ECM)
10
EVAP, Lambda-sond,
Injection (petrol)
15
Control module, automatic gearbox*
15
Lambda-sond (4-cyl. petrol, 5-cyl. diesel)
10
Compressor A/C
15
5
Vacuum pump, crankcase
valve (5-cyl. turbo, 2.0
GTDI)
20
Relay coils
Starter motor relay
30
Diesel filter heater
Ignition coils 4-cyl. petrol,
Glow control module
10
Crankcase ventilation
heater (5-cyl. diesel)
5
Ignition coils 5, 6-cyl. petrol
20
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel)
70
Cooling fan (4 - 5-cyl. petrol)
60
Cooling fan (6-cyl. petrol),
(5-cyl. diesel)
80
Electro-hydraulic power
steering (1.6D)
80
Electro-hydraulic power
steering (other)
100
Engine control module,
Throttle petrol
10
Engine control module,
Throttle diesel
15
15
Mass air flow sensor,
valves (5-cyl diesel)
Engine valves
10
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
307
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Under the glovebox
Positions
Box
A
Function
A
Primary fuse, control
module, audio
40
Box
A
Bass speaker
-
-
-
-
08
-
308
-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function
A
-
-
Keyless, door handle
5
-
-
Control panel, driver's
door
20
Control panel, front passenger door
20
Box
A
Function
A
Control panel, rear passenger door, right
20
Control panel, rear passenger door, left
20
Keyless*
7,5
Power seat driver's side*
20
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Box
A
Function
A
Power seat passenger
side*
Function
A
20
Seat heating, rear passenger side* right
15
Folding head restraint*
15
Seat heating, rear passenger side* left
15
ICM
5
Parking assistance*
5
Radio, Display, RTI*
10
Parking camera*
Infotainment system
15
RTI*
Telephone, BluetoothTM*
5
Control module AWD*
10
-
-
Active chassis Four-C*
10
Sun roof*, interior lighting
roof, climate sensor
5
Cigarette lighter
15
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE)*
Box
A
Box
B
Function
A
-
-
-
-
Box
B
Function
A
Adaptive cruise control,
ACC*, collision warning
system *
10
Interior lighting, Rain sensor
7,5
Steering wheel module
7,5
Central locking system
rear, fuel filler flap
10
Washers
15
Windscreen washers
15
Opening boot lid
10
10
Seat heating (passenger
side)
15
Interior lighting, Power
driver's seat*
Seat heating (driver's side)
15
Information display (DIM)
7,5
Fuel pump
20
Remote control key
receiver, Alarm*, Climate
5
Steering lock
15
Alarm/OBDII
5
-
-
5
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
309
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Box
B
A
Function
A
Airbag
10
Collision warning system,
radar front
5
Accelerator pedal, electric
engine block heater (diesel), power door mirrors*,
seat heating, rear *
7,5
Infotainment (ICM), CD &
RadioA
15
Brake light
5
Sun roof*
20
Immobiliser
5
Not Premium or High Performance.
08
310
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Maintenance and service
Fuses
Cargo area
Positions
Rear fuse box
A
Electric parking brake, left
30
Electric parking brake, right
30
Rear window defroster
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
Rear fuse box
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trailer socket 1*
-
Rear 12V socket
40
-
08
-
15
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
311
08 Maintenance and service
Car care
Washing the car
IMPORTANT
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when it has been switched on for a time.
• Hose down the underbody.
• Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
High-pressure washing
For cleaning:
Testing the brakes
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper.
• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
312
During the first few months a new car must
only be handwashed. This is because the
paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
surfaces.
soap solution or car shampoo.
08
NOTE
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
•
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
Do not spray directly onto the locks.
•
Automatic car washes
Cleaning the wiper blades
Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 299.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-
08 Maintenance and service
Car care
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing
after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Water-repellent coating*
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in
order to maintain the water-repellent properties. This should be used first after three years
and then each year.
Rustproofing – inspection and
maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
313
08 Maintenance and service
Car care
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does
not require treatment for approximately 12
years. After this period, it should be treated at
three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for
assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
important to keep the car clean. The car's rustproofing needs to be checked regularly and
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be
maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Volvo's cleaning agents can also be used for
stains on the mat, after vacuuming.
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
08
314
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic
detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the
seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is available from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
•
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and approved in accordance with the OekoTex 100 standard and is treated to preserve its
original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
08 Maintenance and service
Car care
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-moistened sponge and neutral soap.
• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
Touching up minor paintwork damage
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings and doors.
2. Same procedure as group I.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more
difficult cleaning.
Materials
• primer in a can
• spray can or touch-up pen1
• masking tape
Colour code
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group I.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
1
Car colour code
08
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen.
``
315
08 Maintenance and service
Car care
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 320.
Repairing stone chips
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
NOTE
G021832
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the
bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the damaged surface.
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
08
316
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
08 Maintenance and service
08
317
Type designations.................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure .........................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Type approval.......................................................................................
Symbols in the display..........................................................................
318
320
322
325
326
328
330
332
335
336
346
SPECIFICATIONS
09 Specifications
09
Type designations
Label location
320
09 Specifications
Type designations
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right rear door is opened.
09
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code, component and serial numbers.
The engine oil label specifies oil grade and
viscosity.
Gearbox type designation and serial number.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
321
09 Specifications
09
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
Dimensions
A
B
C
322
Wheelbase
Length
Load length, floor, folded
rear seat
D
Load length, floor
E
Height
F
Load height
mm
2776
Dimensions
G
Front track
4628
H
Rear track
1749
965
1484
465
mm
Load width, floor
mm
J
Width
1865
1578B
K
Width including door mirrors
2097
1585A/
1575B
I
Dimensions
1588A/
919
A
B
with 16" wheel
with 17" wheel
09 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table page 324) influences the payload and is
not included in the kerb weight.
09
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.
For information on decal location, see page 320.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
Equipment level
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
``
323
09 Specifications
09
Dimensions and weights
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
2.0T
Manual, MMT6
1800
90
2.0T
Automatic, MPS6
1800
90
T6 AWD
Automatic, TF-80SC
1800
90
D3
Manual, M66
1600
75
D3
Automatic, TF-80SC
1600
75
D5
Manual, M66
1600
75
D5
Automatic, TF-80SC
1800
90
D5 AWD
Automatic, TF-80SC
1800
90
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
750
324
Max. towball load (kg)
50
09 Specifications
Engine specifications
09
Engine specifications
Model
Engine
code
Output
(kW/
rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept volume (litres)
Compression ratio
2.0T
B4204T6
149/6000
203/6000
300/1750–4000
4
88
83
1.999
10.0:1
T6
B6304T4
224/93
304/5600
440/2100–4200
6
82
93
2.953
9.3:1
D3
D5204T2
120/50
163/3000
400/1400–2750
5
81
77
1.984
16.5:1
D5
D5244T10
151/4000
205/4000
420/1500–3250
5
81
93
2.400
16.5:1
325
09 Specifications
Engine oil
09
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
•
•
•
326
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter than +40 °C
Viscosity chart
09 Specifications
Engine oil
09
Engine oil grade
Engine variant
T6
Engine code
Volume between
Volume, incl. oil filter
MIN and MAX (litres)
(litres)
B6304T4
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
1.2
6.8
D3
D5204T2
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
1.0
5.9
D5
D5244T10
1.0
5.9
2.0T
B4204T6
0.6
4,1
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
327
09 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
09
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox
Volume (litres)
MMT6
1.7
M66
1.9
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 350M3
Automatic gearbox
Volume (litres)
MPS6
7.3
TF-80SC
7.0
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 341
Fluid
System
Coolant
2.0T
10.5
T6, D3 and D5
8.9
Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed
with 50% waterA, see the packaging.
Brake fluid
Brake system
0,4
DOT 4+
Power steering fluid
Power steering
Washer fluid
Fuel
A
328
Volume (litres)
Prescribed grade
–
WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
Cars with headlamp washing
5.4
Cars without headlamp washing
4.0
Use a washer antifreeze recommended
by Volvo, mixed with water.
Petrol engine
approx. 67
Petrol: see page 254
Diesel engine
approx. 67
Diesel: see page 255
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
09 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
09
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, this may be necessary under adverse driving conditions,
see page 328.
329
09 Specifications
09
Fuel
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
A
C
2.0T
263
11.3
146
6.3
189
8.1
2.0T
262
11,2
153
6.6
193
8.3
T6 AWD
337
14,5
170
7.3
231
9.9
D3
188
7.2
111
4,2
139
5.3
D3
221
8.4
123
4,7
159
6.0
D5
181
6.9
114
4.3
139
5.3
D5
239
9,1
124
4,7
166
6.3
D5 AWD
245
9.3
142
5.4
179
6.8
A = urban driving (l/100 km)
B = driving on main roads (l/100 km)
C = combined driving (l/100km)
330
B
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
09 Specifications
Fuel
increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
•
• If the customer has specified wheels larger
The driver's driving style.
than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increases.
•
High speed results in increased wind resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to 1.
09
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary acceleration as well as braking too hard.
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 276.
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 13 and 250.
See page 254 for general information on fuel.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
1
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 682/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with the D5 engine and 6-speed
manual transmission are started in 2nd gear under normal conditions. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in
accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and
give the value for CO2 emissions.
331
09 Specifications
09
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved dimensions
In certain countries not all approved dimensions are indicated by the registration document or other documents. The table below
Engine
2.0T
FWD/
man/
AWD
aut
LI
FWD
man
91
aut
SS
drive (AWD) and the type of transmission is
needed to read the table. For information with
respect to these details, see page 320.
205/60R16
215/55R16
215/50R17
235/45R17
235/40R18
7Jx16x50
7Jx16x50
7Jx17x50
8Jx17x55
8Jx18x55
V
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
92
V
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
T6
B6304T4
AWD
aut
95
W
-
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
D3
D5204T2
FWD
man
92
V
-
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
aut
93
V
-
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
man
92
V
-
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
aut
93
V
-
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
aut
94
V
-
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
Ⴋ
D5
D5
332
B4204T6
shows all approved combinations of wheel
rims and tyres, and the lowest permitted load
index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Information on
engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all-wheel
D5244T10
D5244T10
FWD
AWD
09 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
09
Approved tyre pressures
Variant
Tyre size
Speed
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
(km/h)
2.0
front
Rear
front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
205/60 R 16
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
215/55 R 16
160 +
260
240
280
260
-
235/45 R 17
SST
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
160 +
260
260
280
280
-
215/55 R 16
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
235/45 R 17
160 +
280
240
300
260
-
215/50 R 17
0 - 160
240
240
260
260
260
235/40 R18
160 +
300
240
320
280
-
235/45 R 17
SST
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
160 +
280
280
300
300
-
215/50 R 17
235/45 R 17
235/40 R18
T6
``
333
09 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
09
Variant
Tyre size
Speed
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
(km/h)
front
Rear
front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
D5 FWD
215/55 R 16
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
D3
215/50 R 17
160 +
260
240
280
260
-
235/45 R 17
SST
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
160 +
260
260
280
260
-
215/55 R 16
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
235/45 R 17
160 +
260
240
280
260
-
215/50 R 17
0 - 160
240
240
260
260
260
235/40 R18
160 +
280
240
300
260
-
235/45 R 17
SST
0 - 160
230
230
260
260
260
160 +
260
260
280
280
-
max. 80
420
420
420
420
-
235/45 R 17
235/40 R18
D5 AWD
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
334
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
09 Specifications
Electrical system
Electrical system
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle.
09
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V)
Cold start capacity,
Reserve capacity
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
(minutes)
12
520–700
100–135
12
700–760
120–135
335
09 Specifications
09
Type approval
Remote control system
Country
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
336
Country
ROK
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control key
system conforms to
the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of
directive 1999/5/EC.
Country
Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany RLPD1-03-0151
BR
RC
CCAB06LP1940T4
09 Specifications
Type approval
09
Declaration of Conformity
Country
Countries in the EU
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: BluetoothŸ device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
``
337
09 Specifications
09
Type approval
Country
338
Czech Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento BluetoothŸ Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími
příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr BluetoothŸ Module overholder de væsentlige
krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät BluetoothŸ Module in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
09 Specifications
Type approval
09
Country
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme BluetoothŸ Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja
nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this BluetoothŸ Module is in compliance with the essential requirements
and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el BluetoothŸ Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales
y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ BluetoothŸ Module ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ
ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil BluetoothŸ Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles
et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo BluetoothŸ Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle
altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka BluetoothŸ Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem
ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis BluetoothŸ Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
Netherlands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel BluetoothŸ Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen
en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan BluetoothŸ Module jikkonforma mal-ĘtiĒijiet essenzjali u ma
provvedimenti oĘrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a BluetoothŸ Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek
és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
``
339
09 Specifications
09
Type approval
Country
340
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że BluetoothŸ Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz
pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este BluetoothŸ Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta BluetoothŸ Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili
direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že BluetoothŸ Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia
Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että BluetoothŸ Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna BluetoothŸ Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this BluetoothŸ Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements
and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret BluetoothŸ Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
09 Specifications
Type approval
09
Country
China:
㄀कϝᴵǂ䖯ষ੠⫳ѻॖଚ೼݊ѻકⱘ䇈ᯢк៪Փ⫼᠟‫ݠ‬Ёˈᑨߞॄϟ䗄᳝݇‫ݙ‬ᆍ˖
ᷛᯢ䰘ӊЁ᠔㾘ᅮⱘᡔᴃᣛᷛ੠Փ⫼㣗ೈˈ䇈ᯢ᠔᳝᥻ࠊǃ䇗ᭈঞᓔ݇ㄝՓ⫼ᮍ⊩˗
ƵՓ⫼乥⥛˖*+]
Ƶㄝᬜܼ৥䕤ᇘࡳ⥛(,53˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨P:៪싨G%P ǂķ
Ƶ᳔໻ࡳ⥛䈅ᆚᑺ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨G%P0+](,53ķ
Ƶ䕑乥ᆍ䰤˖SSP
Ƶᴖᬷথᇘ䕤ᇘࡳ⥛ᇍᑨ䕑⊶f ‫ֵס‬䘧ᏺᆑҹ໪˖
•
•
•
•
•
싨G%PN+]0+]
싨G%PN+]*+]
싨G%P0+]*+]
싨G%P0+]*+]
싨G%P0+]݊ᅗ *+]
ϡᕫ᪙㞾᳈ᬍথᇘ乥⥛ǃࡴ໻থᇘࡳ⥛ࣙᣀ乱໪ࡴ㺙ᇘ乥ࡳ⥛ᬒ໻఼ˈϡᕫ᪙㞾໪᥹໽㒓៪ᬍ⫼݊ᅗথᇘ໽㒓˗
Փ⫼ᯊϡᕫᇍ৘⾡ড়⊩ⱘ᮴㒓⬉䗮ֵϮࡵѻ⫳᳝ᆇᑆᡄ˗ϔᮺথ⦄᳝ᑆᡄ⦄䈵ᯊˈᑨゟे‫ذ‬ℶՓ⫼ˈᑊ䞛প᥾ᮑ⍜䰸ᑆ
ᡄৢᮍৃ㒻㓁Փ⫼˗
Փ⫼ᖂࡳ⥛᮴㒓⬉䆒໛ˈᖙ乏ᖡফ৘⾡᮴㒓⬉Ϯࡵⱘᑆᡄ៪ᎹϮǃ⾥ᄺঞए⭫ᑨ⫼䆒໛ⱘ䕤ᇘᑆᡄ˗
ϡᕫ೼亲ᴎ੠ᴎഎ䰘䖥Փ⫼DŽ
``
341
09 Specifications
09
Type approval
Country
Taiwan:
‫܅‬㧤෷ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲጥ෻䏺ऄรԼ㦕
รԼԲය
ᆖী‫ڤ‬ᎁᢞ‫ٽ‬௑հ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲΔॺᆖ๺‫ױ‬Δֆ‫׹‬Ε೸ᇆࢨࠌ‫݁ृش‬լ൓ᖐ۞!᧢‫ޓ‬᙮෷Ε‫ף‬Օ‫פ‬෷ࢨ᧢‫଺ޓ‬๻ૠհ௽ࢤ
֗‫פ‬౨Ζ
รԼ؄ය
‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲհࠌ‫ش‬լ൓ᐙ᥼ଆ౰‫ڜ‬٤֗եឫ‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΙᆖ࿇෼‫ڶ‬եឫ෼ွழΔ!ᚨ‫ܛم‬ೖ‫ش‬Δࠀ‫ޏ‬࿳۟ྤեឫழֱ൓ᤉ
ᥛࠌ‫ش‬Ζছႈ‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΔਐࠉሽॾऄ๵ࡳ!‫܂‬ᄐհྤᒵሽຏॾΖ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲႊ‫ٽ࠹ݴ‬ऄຏॾࢨՠᄐΕઝᖂ֗᠔᛭‫ش‬ሽं
ᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲ๻ໂհեឫΖ
CCAB10LP0230T7
342
09 Specifications
Type approval
09
Country
South Korea:
Applicant name: VOLVO
Product information: 뇗빃뇐ꚯ
Customer information: 際闘뇐ꚯ
User caution: ꩧ끤녋늷넓ꩧ뼨
Applicant code: 겛뙨녋뤏麗
Product name: 뇗빃ꑀ
Model name: ꑣ鴳ꑀ
Production date: ꪘꩫ驛뎗
Alpine Electronics Inc.
Production country: Japan
In case the product has broken, the contact information (company's name, phone No. URL) must be put in the handbook
so that the end user can contact the after service/customer service.
With regard to the product that used the wireless data communication system of 2.5GHz/5Ghz, the following sentence
must be put in the handbook. 鲴뼯ꓯꫛ꫟ꟿ鱏놿볇뿷겛閻鱠ꫬ넯녃냷ꕻꈗ넳ꑀ꼃놿隷隻ꇣ鷗꫗ꟿ걟鱏뼛ꯓ꾁거鲃鲟
Singapore:
``
343
09 Specifications
09
Type approval
Country
The United Arab Emirates
Jordan:
BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4.
South Africa
344
Uruguay
IAM2.1 contains URSEC approved IAM2.1 BT PWB EU.
Jamaica
Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
09 Specifications
Type approval
09
Country
Nigeria
Mexico
Warning
" Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos
de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario."
BluetoothŸ module installation information. This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and
used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC. When this BluetoothŸ Module Board is installed in the
Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall
affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not visible. The exterior label shall use wording such
as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID:
A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections 15.19(a)(3) in FCC
Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product.
345
09 Specifications
09
Symbols in the display
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 70, 71 and 124.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol
illuminates
The red warning symbol
when a fault has been indicated which could
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car.
At the same time an explanatory text is displayed in the information display.
illumiThe yellow information symbol
nates, in combination with text in the information display, when a deviation in any of the car's
systems has occurred. The yellow symbol
information can also illuminate in combination
with other symbols.
346
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Meaning
Page
Low oil pressure
71
Parking brake
71, 115,
116
Indicator and information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Fault in the ABL system*
70, 82
Emissions system
70
Fault in the ABS system
70, 114
Rear fog lamp on
70, 83
Airbags - SRS
21, 71
Seatbelt reminder
18, 71
Alternator not charging
71
Stability system,
DSTC, Trailer stability assist
70, 149,
265
Fault in the brake
system
71, 114
Engine preheater
(diesel)
70
Warning, safety
mode
21, 32,
71, 73
Low level in fuel tank
70, 143
Information, read display text
70
Main beam on
70, 82
09 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Left-hand direction
indicators
70
Right-hand direction
indicators
70
Symbol
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Meaning
Page
Adaptive cruise control*
151, 157,
163
Adaptive cruise control*
163
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Alert*
163, 166
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Alert*
163, 166
Adaptive cruise control*
163
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Alert*
158, 165
Page
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Alert*
158, 165
Adaptive cruise control*
157
Radar sensor*
163, 177
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor *
G025102
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Fuel filler flap, righthand side
253
Low battery
143
Parking brake
116
Rain sensor*
90
Driver Alert System*
180, 180
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning *
180, 183
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning *
183
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
180
09
171, 177,
180, 183
Auto Brake*, Distance Alert*, City
SafetyTM, Collision
warning system *
166, 171,
177
Fuel-driven engine
block heater and
passenger compartment heater*
143
ABL system*
82
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
347
09 Specifications
09
Symbols in the display
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
348
Meaning
Page
Seatbelt reminder
20
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
24, 25
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
25
09 Specifications
09
349
10 Alphabetical Index
A
10
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 155
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 82
Active chassis – FOUR-C........................ 150
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 82
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 150
Adaptive cruise control............................ 155
fault tracing......................................... 162
radar sensor........................................ 161
Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 162
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 145
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 86
halogen headlamp................................ 86
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 80
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 24
driver's and front passenger side......... 22
key switch off........................................ 24
AIRBAG ..................................................... 22
Airbag system ........................................... 21
Air conditioning........................................ 139
general................................................ 132
Air conditioning, AC................................. 139
Air distribution.................................. 134, 140
Air quality system IAQS .......................... 139
Air vents................................................... 134
Alarm..........................................................
alarm indicator......................................
alarm signals.........................................
arming...................................................
checking the alarm...............................
deactivating..........................................
deactivating a triggered alarm..............
reduced alarm level..............................
temporary disarming of the alarm........
testing the alarm system......................
61
61
61
61
45
61
61
62
62
62
Alcolock................................................... 100
Audio system........................................... 200
functions............................................. 206
overview.............................................. 202
Audio volume ..........................................
phone..................................................
phone/media player............................
ring signal, phone...............................
203
235
235
235
Auto
climate control settings...................... 138
Automatic car washes............................. 312
Automatic gearbox..................................
manual gear positions (Geartronic).....
towing and recovery...........................
trailer...................................................
107
108
266
261
Allergy and asthma inducing substances.................................................... 133
Automatic locking...................................... 55
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 112
AUX.................................................. 202, 220
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 112
Auxiliary heater........................................ 145
Approach light, duration............................ 86
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 112
Audio
settings....................................... 206, 207
surround..................................... 200, 207
audio system .......................................... 202
Automatic relocking................................... 54
B
Backrest..................................................... 76
front seat, lowering............................... 76
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 78
350
10 Alphabetical Index
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 113
emergency brake lights........................ 83
filling brake fluid.................................. 291
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 114
Bag holder .............................................. 258
Battery............................................. 301, 335
maintenance....................................... 301
Remote control .................................. 231
remote control key/PCC....................... 48
start assistance................................... 106
symbols on the battery....................... 301
warning symbols................................. 301
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 191
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 191
BluetoothŸ
handsfree ...........................................
media .................................................
microphone off ..................................
streaming audio .................................
transfer call to mobile ........................
232
223
234
223
234
Bonnet, opening...................................... 286
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 293
Chassis settings...................................... 150
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 290
Children.....................................................
child safety locks..................................
child seats and side airbags.................
location in the car.................................
safety....................................................
C
Child safety locks...................................... 60
Calls
incoming............................................. 234
operation............................................. 234
Child seats.................................................
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . .
recommended......................................
size classes for child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system.................................
upper mounting points for child seats..
Camera sensor................................ 169, 175
Car care................................................... 312
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 314
Boot lid
locking/unlocking.................................. 56
Cargo area
loading................................................ 257
load retaining eyelets.......................... 258
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 291
Car upholstery......................................... 314
Brake light.................................................. 83
Car wash.................................................. 312
Brakes...................................................... 113
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 113
brake light............................................. 83
brake system...................................... 113
electric parking brake......................... 115
Catalytic converter................................... 254
recovery.............................................. 266
CD ........................................................... 216
Centre console........................................ 127
10
33
37
26
33
33
Child seat................................................... 33
33
37
35
37
39
City Safety™............................................ 168
Cleaning
automatic car washes.........................
car wash.............................................
rims.....................................................
seatbelts.............................................
upholstery...........................................
312
312
313
314
314
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 133
Climate control........................................ 132
general................................................ 132
sensors............................................... 132
351
10 Alphabetical Index
Clock, setting............................................. 73
10
CO2 emissions ........................................ 330
Collision..................................................... 32
Collision warning............................. 172, 173
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 161, 168, 173
DAB Radio............................................... 213
Deadlocks.................................................. 58
deactivation.......................................... 58
temporary deactivation......................... 58
Diesel....................................................... 255
Colour code, paint................................... 315
Diesel particle filter.................................. 256
Combined instrument panel.................... 124
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 289
Comfort inside the passenger compartment......................................................... 195
Direction indicators.................................... 84
Compass................................................... 97
calibration............................................. 97
Display lighting.......................................... 81
controls
centre console ........................... 203, 244
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 109
Distance Alert.......................................... 165
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 200
Door mirrors............................................... 94
Controls
centre console.................................... 127
Driveable punctured tyres........................ 279
Cooling system........................................ 250
Driver Alert System.................................. 179
Corner Traction Control .......................... 148
Driving......................................................
cooling system....................................
with the boot lid open.........................
with trailer...........................................
Crash, see Collision................................... 32
Cruise control.......................................... 151
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 133
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 323
towing capacity.................................. 323
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 148
DVD ......................................................... 216
Defroster.................................................. 139
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 172
Condensation in headlamps.................... 312
352
D
Driver Alert Control.................................. 179
250
250
251
260
Driving in water........................................ 250
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 135
Economical driving.................................. 250
ECO pressure.......................................... 276
Electrical socket...................................... 197
cargo area........................................... 258
front seat............................................. 197
Electric parking brake..............................
low battery voltage.............................
releasing automatically.......................
releasing manually..............................
115
115
116
116
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 277
Emergency puncture repair..................... 280
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 256
Engine
overheating......................................... 260
starting................................................ 104
10 Alphabetical Index
Engine block heater
fuel-driven........................................... 142
Engine compartment
coolant................................................
oil........................................................
overview..............................................
power steering fluid............................
290
288
287
291
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 19
External dimensions................................ 322
F
Fan........................................................... 137
Fuses.......................................................
box in cargo area................................
changing.............................................
general................................................
relay/fuse box in engine compartment....................................................
304
311
304
304
305
Fuse table
fuses in engine compartment............. 306
Engine drag control ................................ 148
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 170, 176
Engine oil......................................... 287, 326
adverse driving conditions.................. 326
capacities........................................... 326
filter..................................................... 288
oil grade.............................................. 326
First aid equipment.................................. 277
Engine specifications............................... 325
Fluids and oils.......................................... 328
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 13
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 83
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 109
Error messages
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183
see Messages and symbols............... 163
Foot brake............................................... 113
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 109
Error messages in BLIS........................... 193
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 166
Error messages in the Adaptive cruise control............................................................ 163
ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 136
First aid kit .............................................. 277
Floor mats................................................ 196
Fluids, capacities..................................... 328
FOUR-C – Active chassis........................ 150
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
Fuel..........................................................
fuel consumption................................
fuel economy......................................
fuel filter..............................................
254
330
276
255
Fuse box.................................................. 304
glovebox............................................. 308
10
G
Gearbox................................................... 107
automatic............................................ 107
manual................................................ 107
Geartronic................................................ 108
Glass
laminated/reinforced............................. 92
Global opening........................................ 133
Glovebox................................................. 196
locking.................................................. 55
Gross vehicle weight............................... 323
353
10 Alphabetical Index
10
H
I
Hazard warning flashers............................ 84
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 133
Headlamp levelling.................................... 81
IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 28
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 86
Ignition keys............................................... 74
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights .......................... 86
Immobiliser................................................ 43
Headlamps............................................... 293
Inflatable curtain........................................ 28
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 78
lowering................................................ 79
Information and warning symbols............. 70
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 91
iPodŸ, connection................................... 220
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 45
Information button, PCC...................... 44, 45
Information displays.................................. 69
Kerb weight.............................................. 323
Key............................................................. 42
Key blade................................................... 46
Keyless drive...................................... 50, 104
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 50, 104
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 80, 127, 151, 204
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 92
High engine temperature......................... 260
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 81
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 91
Home safe lighting..................................... 85
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 66
right-hand drive.................................... 68
Hoot........................................................... 80
Instruments and controls........................... 66
Lane Departure Control........................... 182
Horn........................................................... 80
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 84
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 314
Interior rearview mirror............................... 96
automatic dimming............................... 96
Lighting.................................................... 293
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 82
HomeLinkŸ .............................................. 118
200
203
244
202
202
240
K
Infotainment system ...............................
basic functions ..................................
menus ................................................
overview .............................................
source buttons ...................................
voice control.......................................
Heating.................................................... 138
rearview and door mirrors.................... 95
rear window.......................................... 95
seats................................................... 137
354
Intermittent wiping..................................... 90
Key positions............................................. 74
L
Labels...................................................... 320
Laminated glass......................................... 92
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 293
10 Alphabetical Index
approach light, duration....................... 86
automatic lighting, passenger compartment...................................................... 85
bulbs, specifications........................... 298
controls................................................. 84
display lighting...................................... 81
headlamp levelling................................ 81
home safe lighting................................ 85
in passenger compartment................... 84
instrument lighting................................ 81
main/dipped beam............................... 81
position/parking lamps......................... 83
rear fog lamp........................................ 83
Lighting, bulb replacement......................
cargo area...........................................
dipped beam halogen.........................
direction indicators.............................
lamp housing, rear..............................
lamp housing, rear, direction indicators......................................................
main beam, Xenon lamp.....................
main beam halogen............................
number plate lighting..........................
vanity mirror........................................
293
297
294
295
296
296
295
295
297
297
Light switches............................................ 81
Loading
cargo area...........................................
general................................................
load retaining eyelets..........................
roof load.............................................
Max. roof load ......................................... 323
257
257
258
257
media player ........................................... 216
Lock confirmation ..................................... 42
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 244
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 54
Menus and messages.............................. 124
Locks
automatic locking.................................
boot lid..................................................
locking..................................................
unlocking..............................................
Menu system MY CAR............................ 127
54
56
54
54
Lubricants................................................ 328
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 328
M
Media, BluetoothŸ ................................... 223
Memory function in seats.......................... 77
Menu structure, Infotainment ................. 244
Messages and symbols
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 171, 177
Distance Alert..................................... 166
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183
Messages and symbols in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 163
Messages in BLIS.................................... 193
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 81
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 124
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 313
Messages in the information display....... 148
Making calls............................................. 234
Manual gearbox....................................... 107
towing and recovery........................... 266
10
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 70
speedometer......................................... 70
tachometer........................................... 70
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 108
355
10 Alphabetical Index
10
Misting.....................................................
attending to the windows...................
condensation in headlamps...............
remove with the air vents...................
timer function......................................
139
132
312
140
139
Mobile phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
235
232
233
240
MY CAR................................................... 127
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 326
Oil level low.............................................. 288
Overheating............................................. 260
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
P
PACOS....................................................... 24
PACOS, switch.......................................... 24
356
making calls........................................
phone book.........................................
phone book, shortcut.........................
receiving a call....................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 315
damage and touch-up........................ 315
Panel lighting............................................. 81
Panic function............................................ 44
Park assist camera.................................. 188
Parking assistance................................... 185
parking assistance sensors................ 187
Parking brake........................................... 115
Parking heater..........................................
battery and fuel...................................
parking on a hill..................................
time setting.........................................
142
142
142
144
Passenger compartment......................... 195
234
236
236
234
233
240
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 99
Polishing.................................................. 313
Position/parking lamps.............................. 83
Power seat................................................. 77
Powershift gearbox.......................... 110, 266
Power sunroof........................................... 98
Power windows......................................... 92
Privacy locking........................................... 47
Passenger compartment filter................. 133
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 142
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 43
range............................................... 44, 45
Petrol grade............................................. 254
Phone
connect............................................... 235
handsfree............................................ 232
incoming calls..................................... 234
R
Radar sensor........................................... 155
limitations........................................... 161
Radio ......................................................
AM/FM ...............................................
DAB ...................................................
Menu structure ..................................
209
209
213
244
Rain sensor................................................ 90
10 Alphabetical Index
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 296
Rearview and door mirrors
compass...............................................
door......................................................
electrically retractable...........................
heating..................................................
interior...................................................
97
94
94
95
96
Remote control key...................................
battery replacement..............................
detachable key blade...........................
functions...............................................
range.....................................................
42
48
46
43
44
Seatbelts.................................................... 18
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 336
Seats.......................................................... 76
head restraints, rear.............................. 78
heating................................................ 137
lowering the front backrest................... 76
lowering the rear backrest.................... 78
power seats.......................................... 77
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 95
Service programme................................. 286
Rear window, defrosting............................ 95
Resetting the power windows................... 93
Set time interval....................................... 165
Recirculation............................................ 139
Retractable power door mirrors................. 94
Side airbags............................................... 26
Recommendations during driving............ 250
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 107
Signal input, external....................... 202, 220
Recommended child seats, table.............. 35
SIPS bags.................................................. 26
Recovery.................................................. 267
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 313
Refrigerant............................................... 133
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 323
Soot filter................................................. 256
Refuelling.................................................
fuel cap...............................................
fuel filler flap, electrical opening.........
fuel filler flap, manual opening............
refuelling.............................................
253
253
253
253
253
Rustproofing............................................ 313
Soot filter full............................................ 256
S
Spin control............................................. 148
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 304
Safety mode.............................................. 32
SST – Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 279
Remote control ....................................... 230
battery replacement ........................... 231
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 76
Stability and traction control system....... 148
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 20
seatbelt tensioner................................. 20
Stability system....................................... 148
Remote control, HomeLinkŸ
programmable ................................... 118
10
Ski hatch.................................................. 259
Spare wheel............................................. 275
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 20
Spin control function............................... 148
Stains....................................................... 314
Start assistance....................................... 106
Steering force, speed related.................. 150
357
10 Alphabetical Index
Steering force level, see Steering force... 150
10
Steering lock............................................ 104
Steering wheel........................................... 80
keypad.......................... 80, 127, 151, 204
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 157
steering wheel adjustment.................... 80
Symbols and messages in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 163
Trailer.......................................................
cable...................................................
driving with a trailer............................
snaking...............................................
260
260
260
265
Trailer stability assist .............................. 148
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 265
Stone chips and scratches...................... 315
T
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment......................................................... 195
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 132
Transponder.............................................. 92
Sun blind.................................................... 94
Temperature control................................ 138
Trip meter.................................................. 73
Sunroof
opening and closing.............................
pinch protection....................................
sunscreen.............................................
ventilation position................................
Testing the alarm system........................... 62
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 148, 265
Timer........................................................ 139
TV ............................................................ 226
Total airing function........................... 55, 133
Type approval, remote control key system........................................................... 336
98
99
99
98
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 99
Surround.......................................... 200, 207
Symbols................................................... 149
indicator symbols................................. 70
information symbols............................. 70
warning symbols................................... 70
Symbols and messages
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 171, 177
Distance Alert..................................... 166
358
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183
Towbar
detachable, attachment ..................... 263
detachable, removal .......................... 264
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 261
Towing..................................................... 266
towing eye.......................................... 267
Towing capacity....................................... 323
Towing equipment................................... 261
specifications...................................... 262
Towing eye.............................................. 267
TPMS – Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 278
Transmission............................................ 107
Trip computer.......................................... 146
Type designation..................................... 320
Tyres
dimensions......................................... 332
direction of rotation............................ 270
driving characteristics......................... 270
maintenance....................................... 270
pressure...................................... 276, 332
puncture repair................................... 280
specifications.............................. 272, 332
speed ratings...................................... 273
tread wear indicators.......................... 271
10 Alphabetical Index
tyre pressure monitoring..................... 278
winter tyres......................................... 272
U
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 54
from the outside................................... 54
USB, connection...................................... 220
V
W
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 323
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 155
collision warning system.................... 173
stability and traction control system. . 148
Warning lamps
airbags SRS..........................................
alternator not charging.........................
fault in brake system............................
low oil pressure.....................................
parking brake applied...........................
seatbelt reminder..................................
warning.................................................
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
Wheels
changing.............................................
installation...........................................
rims.....................................................
snow chains........................................
spare wheel........................................
274
274
271
272
275
Wheels and tyres..................................... 270
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 29
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 29
whiplash injury...................................... 29
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 92
Ventilation................................................ 134
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 173
Vibration damper..................................... 261
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 21
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 240
Warning triangle....................................... 277
Windscreen wipers.................................... 90
rain sensor............................................ 90
Washer fluid, filling................................... 300
Winter driving........................................... 251
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 91
Winter tyres.............................................. 272
Washers
washer fluid, filling.............................. 300
windscreen........................................... 91
Wiper blades............................................
changing.............................................
cleaning..............................................
service position...................................
Vanity mirror...................................... 85, 197
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 92
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 313
10
Windscreen washing.................................. 91
299
299
299
299
Wipers and washing.................................. 90
Waxing..................................................... 313
359
10 Alphabetical Index
10
360
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&&-():c\a^h]!6I&%'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<ŽiZWdg\'%&%!8deng^\]i©'%%%"'%&%Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
Download PDF